Bosch Solution 64 Specifications

Solution 64
Installer Guide
EN
Intrusion Control Panel
Solution 64 | Installer Guide
Copyright Notice
Telepermit Note
Unless otherwise indicated, this publication is the copyright
of Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd (“Bosch”). All rights are
reserved.
The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates
Telecom acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation
of that device under all operating conditions.
You may download a single copy of this publication. By
downloading the publication you agree that you will: (i)
only use the publication for your own reference; (ii) not
commercially exploit or charge any person for the use of the
publication; and (iii) not modify the publication in any way
without the prior written permission of Bosch.
This equipment shall not be used in any manner that could
constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
Except as specified above or where authorised by the
Copyright Act 1968 (Cth), no part of this publication may be
reproduced, transmitted, modified or stored in any form or by
any means, without the prior written permission of Bosch.
Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become
physically damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.
The transmit level from this device is set as a fixed level
and because of this there may be circumstances where the
performance is less than optimal. Before reporting such
occurrences as faults, please check the line with a standard
telepermitted telephone.
Notice of Liability
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of
this document, neither Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd nor
any of its official representatives shall have any liability to any
person or entity with respect to any liability, loss or damage
caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the
information contained in this book.
Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd reserves the right to make
changes to features and specifications at any time without
prior notification in the interest of ongoing product
development and improvement..
ii
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Contents
Contents
Section 1
Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
Features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
Section 2
Installing the Hardware - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
Section 6
Area Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
AREA COMMANDS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AREA PROPERTIES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Area Reporting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AREA TESTING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6-1
6-2
6-5
6-6
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
Section 7
Input Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Section 3
Wiring Diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
Section 8
Output Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1
Mounting the Enclosure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Module Spaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Panel LED Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Panel Address Select - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Keypad Button Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Keypad Installation and Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Keypad Address Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Status Icons & LED Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Keypad Tones - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Zone Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EOL Resistor Colour Code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Board Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Terminal Descriptions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
Section 4
Programming Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
Entering Programming Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Exiting Programming Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Command Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Programming Option Bit Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Navigating The Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - List Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Alpha Text - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clock Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Telephone Numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Reporting Back to Base - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Service Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Defaulting the System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Triggering a Duress Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Domestic Template Defaults - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Direct Link Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Zone Array - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Testing the System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Basic Reporting Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Menu Reference Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
Section 5
Access Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
User Default Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - User PIN Codes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - User Tokens - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - User RF Keyfobs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - User Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Understanding Timer Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PROX READERS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-8
Input Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Zone Default Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
ZONE PROPERTIES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
Understanding Access Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6
Adding RF Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
Global Input Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
input testing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
Output Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Output Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Timed Outputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Output Testing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Output Event Type Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Output Default Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8-1
8-2
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-9
Section 9
Comms Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1
Comms Programming Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1
Phone Number Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2
COMMS Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
Reporting Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
Comms Registration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-11
Comms Testing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-11
Section 10
Device Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-1
Device Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-1
Keypad Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
RF Receiver Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
Serial Device options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-7
Section 11
System Programming - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-1
System commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-1
System Trouble Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
System Clock - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-4
System Timers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
System Power Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-7
Horn Speaker Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-8
System Schedules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-9
System Holidays - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-11
System Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12
System Testing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-14
iii
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Contents
Section 12
Programming Examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-1
Section 13
Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-1
Section 14
Index - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14-1
iv
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 1
Overview
Features
Overview
Listed below are the main features of the Solution 64 Control
Panel.
Zones
The Solution 64 control panel provides up to 64 separate zones
of protection. Zone programming determines the panel’s
response to open/short and tamper conditions on the zone
loop.
 Individual Box Tamper Circuit Monitoring
 Voice Module With Multi-event Messages (Optional)
 Report Via Email (Internet)
 Telephone Line Busy Tone Detect
 RAS Intelli-connect® CLI Caller Line Identification
 Daylight Savings Auto Time Adjust
 Senior Watch
 System Maintenance Interval Reminder
 System Weekly Test Reminder
 Area Inactivity Interval
 Temporary Pin Code
 Dual Reporting
 Alarm Report Abort/cancel Options
 8 Programmable Holiday Calendars
 8 Programmable Schedules
 16 On-board Zones (Exp To 64 Wired or Wireless)
 Fire Alarm Verification
 48 Pin Codes
 3 Supervised High Power Digital Outputs
 1 Relay 2 Amp Form (C) Contact (Expandable to 13)
 Supervised Siren Driver
 Partitionable To 8 Areas
 Dialler Reports SIA, Contact ID, SMS and Email Formats
 Supervised LAN Keypads (Maximum 8 Keypads)
 Keyswitch Input
 256 History Event Memory
 Fully Menu Text Programmable
 Programmable Via Solutionlink Software(Remote/Direct)
Areas
The control panel supports up to 8 separate areas. You can
assign all zones to a single area, or you can assign each zone to
a combination of different areas.
You can arm and disarm the control panel by area,
alternatively, you can arm and disarm several areas at the same
time.
Dialler
The control panel has a built-in dialler to send reports to the
receiving party (ie. Security company monitoring station,
mobile phone etc).
Keypads
You can connect a maximum of 8 fully supervised keypads
to the control panel. The available current affects the total
number of keypads that you can connect without the need to
provide additional power supplies.
History Log
The control panel can store up to 256 history events from
all 8 areas. All events are stored in the log, even if they are
programmed not to report via the on-board dialler.
You can view the control panel’s history log via keypad, serial
printer (optional), or by connection of a personal computer
(direct/remote) using the SolutionLink upload/download
software.
Programming
You can program the Solution 64 either by a keypad or using a
personal computer using the SolutionLink upload/download
software.
 Telephone Line Fail Monitor
 Time Executed Functions
 60 Output Event Types
 Exit Restart
 Expansion Module SuperSolution
 DTMF Tone Decoder Built In
 Remote and Auto Arming
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
1-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Section 1 - Overview
This page left intentionally blank
1-2
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 2
Installing the Hardware
Mounting the Enclosure
257
The enclosure should be mounted via 4 (screws/bolts) through
the 4 mounting holes in the base. Ensure that the enclosure
is mounted on a solid, flat, vertical surface such that the base
will not flex when tightened. Enclosure dimensions are shown
below.
375
Figure 2: Metal Box – Module Space Allocations
90
Panel LED Indicators
Figure 1 : Enclosure Dimensions
The Solution 64 PCB has two LED indicators (Dialler and Status
LED’s) which display the following information.
Red Dialler LED
Module Spaces
Condition
Off
On
Flashing
Each enclosure has 4 identical module spaces and 1 large
module space that is allocated for non Bosch PCB boards (eg. a
securitel STU).
Each space includes 4 x 10mm stand-offs that the optional
expander PCB boards will mount using screws (screws will
be supplied with each board). The expander board will be
earthed via the screws that mount the PCB to the metal box.
All Bosch modules will mount on these module spaces.
A list of the PCB boards is detailed below
Module
Solution Control Panel
CM100 Voice Command Module
CM110 Output Expander
CM120 LAN Power Supply
CM130 RS232 Port Expander
CM140 GSM Modem Interface
CM150 TCP/IP Interface
Space Occupied
2 Adjacent Module Spaces
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
Using the above table, the installer can determine how
many modules can be mounted in a single enclosure. On
some export models, module 3 will not be available as the
transformer mounts in this location.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Meaning
Offline
On Line (Dialling/Answered)
Incoming Call
Table 1: Dialler LED Meanings
Green Status LED
Condition
Off
On
Flash Once Every 2 Seconds
Slow Flash
Flash Fast
Meaning
Error
Error
OK
Waiting for Direct Connect
AC or Battery Trouble
Table 2: Status LED Meanings
i
During factory defaulting the Status and Dialler LED indicators
will be on steady for approximately 15 seconds.
Note
2-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Section 2 - Installing the Hardware
Panel Address Select
Key
The Solution 64 pcb has three DIP switches (called Panel Node
Select) that must be set. In a multi-panel system, each control
panel (Node) must to be set to a unique address.
The [MAIL] key allows you to read
stored mail. This key can also be used
to initiate a dialler test when you press
and hold for two seconds.
Panel NODE Select DIP Switch Address Settings
Panel to Address
Panel 1
Panel 2
Panel 3
Panel 4
Panel 5
Panel 6
Panel 7
Panel 8
S1
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
S2
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
S3
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
The [] key allows you to move the
cursor to the left when programming
text or telephone numbers.
The [] key allows you to move the
cursor to the right when programming
text or telephone numbers.
The [↑] key allows you to navigate
through menus or to toggle characters
when programming text or telephone
numbers.
Table 3 Panel Node Address Select
i
The [] key allows you to navigate
through menus or to toggle characters
when programming text or telephone
numbers. Pressing the [] key when the
area is disarmed will display any current
trouble conditions.
The node switch should be left at Panel 1 position for Solution
64. OFF-OFF-OFF
Note
The Graphic Keypad has 20, silicone rubber push button keys.
The buttons allow you to input instructions and navigate the
menu screens as required. Some buttons have a secondary
function which is activated by holding them down for two
seconds.
+
for 2 sec
Each button’s function is described below
+
Keypad Button Functions
Key
to
for 2 sec
Description
The numeric keys allow you to enter
numbers when required
Use the [MENU] and the numeric keys
to enter commands. The [MENU] key
is also used to go back one level when
navigating through menus or to exit a
programming location without saving
changes.
The [ON] key allows you to turn an area
or output on. To turn all areas on at the
same time when the system has been
partitioned, press and hold the [ON]
key for two seconds.
The [PART] key allows you to turn an
area Part On. This key can also be used
to bypass a zone or multiple zones
when you press and hold for two
seconds.
The [OFF] key allows you to turn an area
or output off. To turn all areas off at the
same time when the system has been
partitioned, press and hold the [OFF]
key for two seconds.
Description
+
for 2 sec
Pressing the 1 and 3 keys together and
holding them down for 2 seconds will
cause a Panic alarm to be triggered. If
programmed the sirens will sound and
the monitoring station will be notified.
Pressing the 4 and 6 keys together and
holding them down for 2 seconds will
cause a Fire alarm to be triggered. If
programmed the sirens will sound and
the monitoring station will be notified.
Pressing the 7 and 9 keys together and
holding them down for 2 seconds will
cause a Medical alarm to be triggered. If
programmed the sirens will sound and
the monitoring station will be notified.
Keypad Installation and Setup
The Solution 64 control panel can have a maximum of 8
keypads connected via the LAN terminals. Each keypad must
be set to a unique address before they will operate and you will
also need to set the keypad home address in MENU 6-1-3.
Set each keypad address using the table below as a guide.
i
Only 1 Keypad can be assigned to each address.All Keypads are
supplied from the factory set to address 1. OFF-OFF-OFF.
Note
Keypad Address Selection
The [OK] key allows you to save any
changes and exit the command.
2-2
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Section 2 - Installing the Hardware
Keypad DIP Switch Address Settings
Red
LED
On
All On
Flashing
Alarm
Keypad To Address
S1
S2
S3
Keypad 1
Off
Off
Off
Keypad 2
On
Off
Off
Keypad 3
Off
On
Off
Keypad 4
On
On
Off
Keypad 5
Off
Off
On
Keypad 6
On
Off
On
Keypad 7
Off
On
On
Keypad Tones
Keypad 8
On
On
On
Your keypad emits several distinct tones and displays text to
alert you to system events. The volume of the keypad tones
can be adjusted in MENU 6-1-0.
Table 4: Keypad DIP Switch Address Settings
Status Icons & LED Indicators
The following table lists the function of each of the ICON
Symbols and LED Indicators on the Graphic Keypad Display.
Icon
Status
Meaning
The keypad can display the current status of up to
8 areas simultaneously via the Area Icon Indicators.
This option can be disabled in MENU 6-1-4
On
The area is turned All On or Part On
Off
The area is turned Off
Flashing
Fast
The area has an alarm
On
System power is normal
Flashing
System power is missing
Flashing
A fire alarm is active
Off
No fire alarm
On
Fire alarm in memory (Turn the area
All On and Off to Clear).
On
The existing service or trouble
condition has been acknowledged.
Off
No service or trouble conditions exist
Flashing
A service / trouble condition is present
that has not been acknowledged.
On
The area is turned Part On.
Off
The area is not turned Part On.
On
The area is turned off.
Off
The area is turned All On or Part On
On
The area is turned All On
Off
The area is turned Off
On
You have mail waiting to be read
Off
No Mail
On
Area is ready to turn on
(All On / Part On)
Off
Not ready, Zone Open
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Green
LED
Red &
Green
LED
On
Area is off.
Flashing
Area not ready to turn on
Flashing
Installer programming mode is active.
Table 5: ICON & LED Indicator Meanings
Type
Meaning
Fire
Alarm
Tone
When a fire zone sounds an alarm, the keypad
will sound 3 seconds on and 2 seconds off
(repeat).
Burglary
Alarm
Tone
When a burglary zone activates while your
system is turned on, your keypad emits a
continuous siren tone. It sounds for the time
set by your security company.
Trouble
Tone
When a system component is not functioning
properly, your keypad sounds 4 fast short
beeps followed by a 5 second pause (repeat).
Key Press
Tone
Pressing any key on the keypad sounds one
short beep, indicating that the key press is
accepted.
Entry
Delay
Tone
When you enter the premises through a zone
programmed for entry delay, the keypad
sound a Hi/Low tone to remind you to turn off
the area. If the area is not turned off before
the entry delay expires, an alarm condition
will sound and a report may be sent to your
alarm company.
Exit
Delay
Tone
After you turn an area All On, the keypad will
sound 1 short beep every second. During the
last 10 seconds fast short beeps will be heard.
If you don’t exit before the delay time expires
and an exit delay door is faulted, an alarm
occurs.
Error
Tone
If you press an incorrect key, your keypad will
sound a 2 second tone.
Menu
Mode
The keypad will sound a Hi / Lo tone to
indicate you have entered MENU Mode and a
Lo/Hi tone to indicate you have exited MENU
mode.
Chime
Tone
The keypad sounds fast short beeps to alert
you when a zone programmed for chime is
faulted or unsealled.
Table 6: Keypad Tone Meanings
2-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Section 2 - Installing the Hardware
This page left intentionally blank
2-4
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 3
Wiring Diagrams
Zone Wiring
i
Note
:.
N/C
ZONE 1
N/C
ZONE 2
These diagrams show the zone wiring configurations
using Normally-Closed Alarm contacts and Normally-Open
Alarm Contacts. When using Normally-Open Alarm Contacts
you must select Inverted Seal for each zone in MENU 3-18. A shorted loop is a tamper condition for all EOL zone
configurations.
'.$
:.
:.
N/O
ZONE 1
N/O
ZONE 2
'.$
2
Figure 3: N/C No EOL Zone
:.
ALARM
:.
ZONE 2
ALARM
:.

N/O
'.$
N/C
ALARM
:.
(3K3 EOL)

:.

N/C
ALARM
N/O
:.
Figure 4: N/C Single EOL Zone
'.$
ALARM
(6K8 EOL)
ZONE 1
Figure 8: N/O Single EOL Zone
N/O
ALARM
:.
ALARM
'.$
(3K3 EOL)
ZONE 9
TAMPER
(6K8 EOL)
ALARM
N/C

TAMPER
(6K8 EOL)
ZONE 1

:.1
(3K3 EOL)
N/O
'.$
:.
N/C
ZONE 2
ALARM
ZONE 9
Figure 5: N/C Split EOL Zone
ZONE 1


N/C
ZONE 1

'.$
Figure 7: N/O No EOL Zone


N/C

:.
Figure 9: N/O Split EOL Zone
ZONE 1
(3K3 EOL)
:.2
Figure 6: N/C Zone With Tamper
'.$
TAMPER
TAMPER
(6K8 EOL)

:.
N/C
ALARM
N/O
ZONE 1
:.
Figure 10: N/O Zone With Tamper
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
3-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Wiring Diagrams
Terminal Descriptions
EOL Resistor Colour Code
Nº
Name
1
Earth
Earth wire from this terminal is connected
to the Mains earth.
2
3
~ (AC)
~ (AC)
Connection of the A.C. plug pack
transformer
4
5
BAT (-)
BAT (+)
Negative and positive connections to the
stand-by battery. 12 VDC / 7AH
6
7
8
9
10
11
+12 V
+12 V
+12 V
GND
GND
GND
These terminals are used to power
detectors and LAN devices up to 750 mA.
12
13
LAN +
LAN -
These terminals are used to power LAN
devices up to 750 mA.
LAN A
Connect the LAN A data terminal of any
LAN device (eg. Keypads, expansion
boards) to this terminal. The control panel
supports up to 300 m of 24/0.20 (18 AWG)
wire on these terminals.
15
LAN B
Connect the LAN B data terminal of any
LAN device (eg. Keypads, expansion
boards) to this terminal. The control panel
supports up to 300 m of 24/0.20 (18 AWG)
wire on these terminals.
16
COMM+
Alarm power capable of providing a
maximum of 2 Amp (+). This terminal is
PTC Fuse protected.
17
18
19
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
Programmable output, capable of
providing a maximum of 500 mA (-). This
terminal is PTC Fuse protected.
20
21
22
N/C
COM
N/O
2 A @ 24 VDC Relay Output - Form C
contact
23
INPUT
Programmable Input for RF Receivers,
Keyswitch and other devices.
24
ZN 1
Zone 1 and 9 sensor loop input (+).
25
GND
Common (-) for Zone 1 and 2 sensor loop.
26
ZN 2
Zone 2 and 10 sensor loop input (+).
27
ZN 3
Zone 3 and 11 sensor loop input (+).
28
GND
Common (-) for Zone 3 and 4 sensor loop.
29
ZN 4
Zone 4 and 12 sensor loop input (+).
30
ZN 5
Zone 5 and 13 sensor loop input (+).
31
GND
Common (-) for Zone 5 and 6 sensor loop.
32
ZN 6
Zone 6 and 14 sensor loop input (+).
33
ZN 7
Zone 7 and 15 sensor loop input (+).
34
GND
Common (-) for Zone 7 and 8 sensor loop.
35
ZN 8
Zone 8 and 16 sensor loop input (+).
36
37
IN
IN
These terminals are used to connect the
telephone line from the street.
38
39
OUT
OUT
These terminals are used to connect the
premises telephones.
Figure 11: EOL Resistor Colour Chart
14
Selected Resistor Colour Codes
Value
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Band 4
2K2
RED
RED
RED
BROWN
4K7
YELLOW
VIOLET
RED
BROWN
5K6
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BROWN
8K1
GREY
BROWN
RED
BROWN
10K
BROWN
BLACK
ORANGE
BROWN
12K
BROWN
RED
ORANGE
BROWN
Because of variations in the colours used to mark resistors it is
recommended that you use a multimeter to verify the value of
resistors rather than rely on the colour code.
Board Connectors
The following table lists the various sockets, pin headers and
switches located on the panel and their functions.
Connector
Service
Tamper
Default
Voice
Module
Serial
Telco
Relay
Description
This socket allow you to connect a service
Keypad to the panel during installation.
This socket is used to connect the panel
enclosure tamper switch.
This push button is used to reset the control
panel back to factory default.
This is used to connect the optional Voice
Command Module (CM100).
This socket is used to connect serial devices to
the control system like a Serial STU.
This is a RJ12 6P/4C connector that allows
you to connect the control panel to the PSTN
telephone line.
The relay select PIN’s allow you to easily
program the relay common contact to switch
either +12V or GND by fitting a plug on link.
Table 7: Board Connector Descriptions
3-2
Description
Table 8: Terminall Block Descriptions and Functions
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Wiring Diagrams
Figure 12: Terminal Descriptions
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
3-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Wiring Diagrams
Connect To
Cabinet Tamper
16Vac 22VA
Plug Pack
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
+
12VDC
7Ah Sealed
Lead Acid
Battery
Accessories
(e.g. PIR Detectors)
+
-
Connect To
Zone Terminals
NC
COM
Keypad /
LAN Expansion
Device
Siren
Tamper Switch
LAN +
LAN LAN A
LAN B
Relay Output
COM Terminal
-/+ Select PINS
N/C
HORN
SPEAKER
+
-
+
-
+
-
STROBE
ZONE 1
PORT
DIGIFLEX
N/C
VISION
N/C
Security Controller
ZONE 8
N/C
Powered by
ZONE 7
N/C
N12138
ZONE 6
N/C
N12138
ZONE 5
N/C
ON
ZONE 4
N/C
1 2 3
ZONE 3
N/C
Refer To
Documentation
For DIALER &
STATUS LED’s
ZONE 2
SERIAL
12 VDC PIEZO
(NOTE: Short Relay Select PINS COM and +12V)
Incoming Street
Telephone Line
Premises
Telephone
Connect To
Telephone Line
RJ12 6P4C To RJ12 6P4C
Telephone Lead
Figure 13: Wiring Diagram
3-4
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

Programming Overview
The Solution 64 Control System incorporates a menu text
driven interface. This interface is very similar to that found on
many mobile phones. Once programming mode is entered you
will see a number of menu options in the display and these
may vary depending in the user authority level.
Entering Programming Mode
To enter installer program mode enter, PIN + [MENU].
The default Installer PIN is 1234.
The Red and Green LED indicators on the keypad will flash to
confirm Installer programming mode is active.
i
Note
S e c t ion 4
Navigating The Menus
Using the up and down arrow keys to navigate, locate the
desired menu item using the highlight bar and then press the
[OK] key to select.
A new list of menu items will appear. Repeat the above until
the desired menu item is located.
To navigate backwards through the menu items press the
[MENU] key at any time. Alternatively if you know the direct
menu item number press [MENU] + Item Number.
Key
All areas must be disarmed with no active alarms. To disarm
all areas enter the Installer PIN and hold the [OFF] Key for 2
seconds.
Exiting Programming Mode
Press and hold down [MENU] key for 2 seconds.
The system will scan all schedules and peform the functions
relative to the current system. For example if a timed output
should be operated then it will operate and if the system
should be armed it will arm.
i
You can also select Exit and press [OK] from each menu level.
Description

Scrolls Cursor Left

Scrolls Cursor Right

Scrolls Cursor Up

Scrolls Cursor Down
OK
Enter Menu Options or Saves Changes
MENU
Go Back One Level, Abort Current Change or
Hold Down to Exit Programming Mode
0 to 9
Enter Data Value
ON
Turn On Bit Option
OFF
Turn Off Bit Option, Clear to End of Line
Table 9: Keys Used During Programming
Note
Command Menus
When you first enter programming mode a special menu
called the Command Menu will appear at the top of the menu
tree. The Command Menu provides a list of the most common
system funtions like “Turn Chime Mode On”, “Move To An Area”
or “Turn An Area On”.
List Options
Use the up and down arrow keys to step through the available
options. Press [OK] to save or [MENU] to exit without saving.
Zone Type Zn001
Use the up and down arrow keys to navigate and press [OK] to
select the command.
01 - Burglary Delay 1
PreSS  0-9, OK or MENU
Programming O ption Bit Menus
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the 8
different options. To enable an option, press the [ON] key – a
tick will be displayed. To disable an option, press the [OFF] key.
i
Note
You can also enter the option number directly followed by [OK].
You must press the [OK] a second time to confirm the current
setting.
Off On Low Battery
Show Overload
 Report Overload
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
4-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Overview
Alpha Text
Telephone Numbers
Text descriptions are available for Area Name, Zone Name,
User Name, Schedule Name, Holiday Name, Prox Reader Name
and Output Name. Each name can have a maximum of 16
characters.
To program, select primary telephone number under MENU
5-1-1 then enter the digits of the telephone number and press
the [OK] key to save.
Area 2 Name
Use the up and down arrow keys to program special characters
(•, # and Pause).
Primary DEST 1
Reception Area
PreSS ◄►, OK or MENU
0297417000
PreSS  0-9, OK or MENU
When programming text, each numeric key represents a
different group of characters.
Pressing the same numeric key repeatedly will step you
through the available characters assigned to the key. The text
key layout is the same as most phones. Refer to the table
below for detailed character information.
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0




OFF
Characters Assigned To Each Numeric Key
.
,
?
!
&
`
1
A
B
C
a
b
c
2
D
E
F
d
e
f
3
G
H
I
g
h
i
4
J
K
L
j
k
l
5
M
N
O
m
n
o
6
P
Q
R
S
p
q
r
s
T
U
V
t
u
v
8
W
X
Y
Z
w
x
y
z
SPACE
0
Scroll Up through entire character list
Scroll Down through entire character list
Move to left one character position
Move to right one character position
Clear from cursor postiion to end of line
Key
0 to 9

7
9
Once the desired character is displayed press the right arrow
key to move to the next character position.
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Note
The following additional special characters are available by
+ - @ # $ “ & % * : ( ) / < > =
Clock Programming
Use the left and right arrow keys to move to the field and use
the up and down keys to change. Press [OK] to save or [MENU]
to exit without saving.
i
Enter the Digits 0 to 9
Scroll Up through entire character list 0 - 9 • # ,
comma = 2 second pause

Move to left or right one character position
OFF
Clear from cursor position to end of line
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Reporting Back to Base
The following steps are the mimimum requirements to get the
system reporting back to base. Examples assume the panel is
disarmed with no alarms and starting from the factory default
settings.
1)
Enter Program mode.
[1234 + MENU]
2)
Set Time and Date.
[MENU 7-1-0]
3)
Change Default Installer PIN.
[MENU 1-5-2]
4)
Change Default Master Code PIN.
[MENU 1-1-1]
5)
Enter Account (client) Number, Area 1.
[MENU 2-2-0]
6)
Enter Base Primary Telephone Number.
[MENU 5-1-1]
7)
Enter Base Secondary Telephone Number.
[MENU 5-1-2]
8)
Hold Down MENU For 2 Seconds To Exit.
scrolling using the up and down arrow keys.
Scroll through the hours to change from am to pm.
Characters Assigned To Each Numeric Key
Table 11: Phone Number Character Set
Table 10: Text Keypad Character Set
i
p001
Note
SET DATE AND TIME
01-Jan-2005 12:00 am
PreSS , OK or MENU
i
4-2
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Overview
Service Mode
Triggering a Duress Alarm
Service mode when activated disables dialler reporting,
prevents all alarms and prevents all users from arming the
system.
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is off,
Enter, [2] + [5] + [8] + [0] + [8] + [0] + [OK] or [ON].
Turning Service Mode ON
1)
Enter Program Mode.
[1234 + MENU]
2)
Turn Service Mode On.
[MENU 7-0-8]
3)
Follow Display Prompts.
4)
Hold down MENU to exit.
i
Keypads will display the word “SERVICE” in the middle of the
display when service mode is active.
Note
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is on,
Enter, [2] + [5] + [8] + [0] + [8] + [0] + [OFF].
i
Duress alarms are triggered by entering the user PIN followed by
the last 2 digits of the user PIN followed by the ON or OFF key.
Note
Domestic Template Defaults
The following table list the changes that will occur when you
select domestic default. See MENU 7-0-3 — Domestic Default.
Program Option
Domestic��������������
Default������
�������������
Value
All Trouble Reports
Disabled
All Bypass Reports
Disabled
All Restore Reports
Disabled
Destination 1 TX Format
Domestic Reporting
Open / Close Reports
Disabled (all areas)
System Events Route
Log Only
Turning Service Mode OFF
1)
Enter Program Mode. [1234 + MENU]
2)
Turn Service Mode On.
[MENU 7-0-8]
3)
Follow Display Prompts.
4)
Hold down MENU To Exit.
i
Table 12: Domesting Reporting Defaults
You must exit Service Mode to reactivate the system. Service
mode will automatically exit after 2 hours.
Note
Defaulting the System
Defaulting the system will reset all programming options back
to the factory default setting. All programming information will
be erased.
Hardware Default
1)
Remove All Power To The System. AC and Battery.
2)
Press and Hold The Default Push Button Down Then Apply
Power To The System.
3)
Release Button, The Panel Will Reset And Revert To Normal
Operation When Default Is Complete.
Direct Link Programming
The panel can be programmed via the SolutionLink™ Upload/
Download software in either Direct Link or Remote Link modes.
For Direct Link you will need a CM900 Direct Link module
which is used to connect the panels serial port to the PC.
Once the cable is connected you will need to hold down
the default switch on the panel for 5 seconds to initiate the
programming session. See the board layout drawings in
Section 3 of this manual for the default switch location.
Software Default
1)
Enter Program Mode.
[1234 +MENU]
2)
Select Factory Default Option.
[MENU 7-0-4)
3)
The Panel Will Reset And Revert To Normal Operation When
Default Is Complete.
i
Note
You can disable factory defaulting using MENU 7-7-4. If factory
defaulting has been disabled you must know the installer PIN to
perform a factory default otherwise the system will need to be
returned to your supplier for defaulting. Charges will apply.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
4-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Overview
Zone Array
Basic Reporting Reference
The feature allows you to view the condition of all zones on
the panel in banks of 16 zones at a time. From the installer
programing mode press MENU 3-0-1 to access the zone array.
The following table is a shortform point ID listing.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll up and down the
zone banks and Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
For a complete listing of all the CID and SIA event reporting
information that will be sent by the Solution Control panel
contact your distributor or visit www.Bosch.com.au.
Point ID Table
Module Description
Ur999
Installer
Ur001 - 256
Users
Ur000
Quick Arm
Zn999
Keyfob Low Battery
Zn998
Keyfob Panic Alarm
Zn891-898
Panels 1-8
Zn881-888
Keypads 1-8
Zn871-878
Ethernet 1-8
Zn861-868
GSM 1-8
Zn851-858
Output Expander 1-8
Zn841-848
Serial Expander 1-8
Zn831-838
Lan P/Supply 1-8
Zn821-828
RF Reciever 1-8
Zn811-818
Access 1-8
Testing the System
Zn801-808
X10 1-8
You will need to be in programming mode before accessing
the test functions listed below.
Zn791-798
Lift 1-8
Zn001-128
Zones
The following information can be displayed depending on the
current zone status.
N= NORMAL
S = SHORTED
A= ALARM
T= TAMPER
- = DISABLED
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NSA-ANAT-------PreSS , OK or MENU
In the above example screen,
N = Zone 01 and 06 are Normal (Sealed)
S = Zone 02 is Shorted
A = Zone 03,05,07 are in Alarm (Unsealed)
T = Zone 08 is in Tamper Alarm (Unsealed)
- = Zone 04, 09-16 are Disabled (Unused)
Walk Test
Use the walk test command MENU 3-9-0 to test and verify that
all zones work correctly.
Table 13: Shortform Point ID Listing
External Audible Test
Use MENU 4-9-0 to test and verify that all horn speakers
operate. This test will sound the horn speaker for two seconds.
Internal Audible Test
Use MENU 4-9-1 to test and verify that all 12 VDC sirens
operate. This test will sound the siren for two seconds.
Strobe Test
Use MENU 4-9-2 To test and verify that the strobe operates.
This test will turn on the strobe until you manually stop the
test.
Battery Test
Use MENU 7-9-1 to test the back-up battery that is connected
to the control panel.
Communication Test
Use MENU 5-9-0 to test the telephone reporting capability of
the control panel. You can also activate a communication test
by holding down the Test / Mail key on the keypad.
4-4
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Overview
Menu Reference Table
The Solution Controller includes a simple text menu system which makes all levels of programming extremely easy. Once a valid
PIN has been entered followed by the MENU key, the system will automatically determine which menus and options the PIN
holder has access to and only those items will be displayed.
There are four basic grouping levels used. Throughout the manual, symbols have been placed near each menu option so that you
can easily relate the authority level which is required to access them.
A=
 = All (No PIN Required)
U=
 = User PIN Has Access
 = Master PIN Has Access
I =  = Installer PIN Has Access
M=
The following table lists all programming menus and the authority level required to access them.
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
AUMI
UMI
AUMI
AUMI
UMI
MI
UMI
UMI
MI
MI
MI
MI
UMI
UMI
UMI
I
UMI
0
Commands
2-0-1
2-0-2
2-0-3
2-0-4
2-0-5
1-1-0
3-0-0
4-0-0
4-0-1
7-1-0
3-0-5
3-9-0
4-9-0
4-9-1
4-9-2
5-0-0
5-0-1
7-9-1
5-9-0
7-0-8
Turn Area On/Off
Turn All Areas On
Turn All Areas Off
Move To Area
Chime On/Off
Change Own PIN
Zone Status
Output Status
Turn Output On/Off
Set Date & Time
Smoke Sensor Reset
Walk Test All Zones
External Siren Test
Internal Siren Test
Strobe Test
Set Domestic Number
Call/Answer RAS
Battery Test
Test Dialler
Service Mode
About
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
1
MI
Access
1-0
Commands
1-0-0 Erase User
UMI
M
MI
MI
I
1-1
1-1-0
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
PIN Codes
Change Own PIN
Change Other PIN
Add PIN
Delete PIN
View PIN
MI
MI
MI
1-2
1-2-0
1-2-1
1-2-2
Token
Add Token
Delete Token
Token Status
MI
MI
I
1-3
1-3-0
1-3-1
1-3-2
RF Keyfob
Add Keyfob
Delete Keyfob
Test Keyfob
MI
MI
I
MI
MI
1-4
1-4-0
1-4-1
1-4-2
1-4-4
1-4-5
User Properties
User Name
Area Assignment
User Options
Timer Group
Access Assignment
I
I
I
I
I
1-5
1-5-0
1-5-1
1-5-2
1-5-3
Global Properties
PIN Length
PIN Retry Count
Installer PIN
PIN Expire Time
I
I
I
I
I
1-6
1-6-0
1-6-1
1-6-2
1-6-3
Prox Reader
Name
Area Assignment
Access Group
Reader Options
I
1-7
Lifts
I
1-9
Access Testing
2
Areas
AUMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
AUMI
2-0
2-0-0
2-0-1
2-0-2
2-0-3
2-0-4
2-0-5
Commands
Area Status
Turn Area On/Off
Turn All Areas On
Turn All Areas Off
Move To Area
Chime On/Off
MI
I
I
I
I
I
2-1
2-1-0
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-1-5
Area Properties
Area Name
General Options
Input Options
Output Options
Reporting Options
Strobe Trigger
I
I
I
2-2
2-2-0
2-2-1
2-2-2
Reporting
Account Dest 1
Account Dest 2
Open Close Route
I
I
I
I
2-9
2-9-0
2-9-1
2-9-2
2-9-3
Area Testing
Area Watch
User Test Interval
Service Interval
Test Options
4-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Overview
4-6
3
Inputs
AUMI
I
UMI
MI
MI
UMI
3-0
3-0-0
3-0-1
3-0-2
3-0-3
3-0-4
3-0-5
Commands
Zone Status
Zone Array
Bypass Zones
Set Chime Zones
Set Part 2 Zones
Smoke Sensor Reset
MI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3-1
3-1-0
3-1-1
3-1-2
3-1-3
3-1-4
3-1-5
3-1-6
3-1-7
3-1-8
Zone Properties
Zone Name
Zone Type
Area Assignment
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Time
Access Group
Report Route
Report Options
Zone Options
I
I
I
3-3
3-3-0
3-3-1
3-3-2
RF Zone
Add RF Device
Delete RF Device
Test RF Device
I
I
I
3-4
3-4-0
3-4-1
3-4-2
Global Input Options
EOL Value
Keyswitch Options
Input Options
I
3-5
3-5-0
PGM Input
Input Type
I
3-6
3-6-0
Tamper Inputs
Tamper Options
UMI
UMI
I
3-9
3-9-0
3-9-1
3-9-2
Input Testing
Walk Test All Zones
Walk Test A Zone
Sensor Watch Time
4
AUMI
UMI
Outputs
4-0
Commands
4-0-0 Output Status
4-0-1 Turn Output On/Off
MI
I
I
I
I
I
I
4-1
4-1-0
4-1-1
4-1-2
4-1-3
4-1-4
4-1-5
4-1-6
Properties
Output Name
Event Type
Event Assignment
Output Polarity
Timer Parameter
Output Options
Macro Group
MI
MI
MI
4-9
4-9-0
4-9-1
4-9-2
Output Testing
External Siren Test
Internal Siren Test
Strobe Test
5
Comms
MI
UMI
MI
MI
MI
MI
I
5-0
5-0-0
5-0-1
5-0-2
5-0-3
5-0-4
5-0-5
5-0-6
Commands
Set Domestic Number
Call /Answer RAS
Call Forward On/Off
Check Web Email
Email System Log
Register Customer
Register Installer
I
I
I
I
I
MI
MI
MI
5-1
5-1-0
5-1-1
5-1-2
5-1-3
5-1-4
5-1-5
5-1-6
5-1-7
Telephone Numbers
Number Prefix
Primary Dest 1
Secondary Dest 1
Primary Dest 2
Secondary Dest 2
Domestic Numbers
Call Forward On
Call Forward Off
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-2
5-2-0
5-2-1
5-2-2
5-2-3
5-2-4
5-2-5
5-2-7
Properties
Call Attempt Count
Dialler Options
Phone Line Options
Country
Line
Service
Set SMS Password
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-3
5-3-0
5-3-1
5-3-2
5-3-3
5-3-4
5-3-5
5-3-6
5-3-7
Remote Access
Call Back Number
RAS Security PIN
Log Threshold
Ring Count
RAS Options
DTMF Options
Voice Access Code
CLI Numbers
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-4
5-4-0
5-4-1
5-4-2
5-4-3
5-4-4
5-4-5
5-4-6
5-4-7
Dialler Reporting
TX Format Dest 1
TX Format Dest 2
Test Route
Status Route
Emergency Route
Swinger Dialler
Burg Report Delay
Fire Report Delay
UMI
I
I
I
I
I
5-9
5-9-0
5-9-1
5-9-2
5-9-3
5-9-4
5-9-5
Comms Test
Send Test Report
Test Report Time
Test Report Period
Test Report Options
Test Route
Dial Number Test
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Overview
6
Devices
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
UMI
6-0
6-0-0
6-0-1
6-0-2
6-0-3
6-0-4
6-0-5
6-0-6
6-0-7
6-0-8
Commands
Keypad Status
RF Status
Serial Status
Output Status
P / Supply Status
GSM Status
Ethernet Status
Access Status
X10 Status
MI
MI
MI
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-1
6-1-0
6-1-1
6-1-2
6-1-3
6-1-4
6-1-5
6-1-6
6-1-7
6-1-8
Keypads
Volume
Contrast
Backlight
Home Area
General Options
Beeper Options
Emergency Keys
Access Group
Lockout Time
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-2
6-2-0
6-2-1
6-2-2
6-2-3
6-2-4
6-2-5
RF Devices
Receiver Options
SuperSolution Time
RF Device Options
Add RF Keypad
Delete RF Keypad
View RF I.D.
I
I
I
6-3
6-3-0
6-3-1
6-3-2
Serial Device
Device Type
Baud Rate
Flow Control
6-5
GSM Modem
6-6
Ethernet
6-7
Access Controller
6-8
X10 Device
7
System
UMI
UMI
UMI
I
I
I
I
7-0
7-0-0
7-0-1
7-0-2
7-0-3
7-0-4
7-0-5
7-0-8
Commands
Panel Status
System Trouble
History Log
Domestic Default
Factory Default
Template Default
Service Mode
MI
I
I
7-1
7-1-0
7-1-1
7-1-2
Clock
Set Date & Time
Summertime On
Summertime Off
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7-2
7-2-0
7-2-1
7-2-2
7-2-3
7-2-4
7-2-5
7-2-6
Timers
Exit Time
Entry Time 1
Entry Time 2
Part Entry Time
Auto Arm Pre Alert
Output Pre Alert
Senior Watch Time
I
I
I
7-3
7-3-0
7-3-1
7-3-2
Power
AC Options
Battery Options
Fuse Options
I
I
I
I
7-4
7-4-0
7-4-1
7-4-2
7-4-3
Siren
Tone
Speed
Volume
Siren Swinger
MI
MI
MI
I
I
7-5
7-5-0
7-5-1
7-5-2
7-5-3
7-5-4
Schedules (TEF)
Name
Time
Day
Function
Index
MI
MI
7-6
7-6-0
7-6-1
Holidays
Name
Start Stop Dates
I
I
I
MI
I
I
7-7
7-7-0
7-7-1
7-7-2
7-7-3
7-7-4
7-7-5
System Options
General Options
Area Options
Keypad Idle Screen
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
Installer Options
Language
UMI
UMI
7-9
7-9-0
7-9-1
System Testing
Walk Test All Zones
Battery Test
Table 12: Menu Reference Table
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
4-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Overview
This page left intentionally blank
4-8
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

Access Programming
The Solution 64 has 48 users which can each use any
combination of pin, radio keyfob or a proximity token to
operate the system. A total of 10 proximity readers can be
connected, 8 of which are integrated within the individual
keypads and upto 2 water resistant external readers.
Each user can be assigned their own unique name upto 16
characters long to identify the user within the system and to
present a greeting message when operating the system. User
PIN’s can be configured for 1 to 8 digits or variable where users
can have different pin lengths up to 8 digits long. All users
have options which can be set to control their authority level
within the system, whether they are allowed to bypass zones
or send open close reports see MENU 1-4-2 — User Options.
The installer Ur999 is a special user within the system and has
ultimate privileges which can not be changed. The Installer PIN
can arm or disarm the system and has access to all menus at
all times. This is a very powerful user pin and should be treated
with utmost respect so that it is not widely known.
Timer Group
Users can belong to a timer group that determines whether or
not the user is allowed access to the system. To create a timer
group you will need to setup a schedule with start and stop
times then set the function to Timer Group and select an index
1 to 8 to represent the timer group. Each user that you require
to be restricted is then assigned to the timer group number
you selected.
Multiple schedules can be used to create multiple access times
within the day and holiday schedules can also be linked with
schedules.
Example:
Restricting access to only Monday to Friday 8am to 10pm.
1)
Pick a timer group number between 1-8 lets say 5.
2)
Setup a schedule start time 8am, stop time 10pm, days MTWTF,
Function =Timer Group, Index=5
3)
Assign each restricted user to Timer Group 5
Schedules
Schedules determine the valid operating times and days and
then the schedule is linked to a timer group number. Users
which are to be restricted are then assigned to the same timer
group number as the schedule.
Access Group
A user can be restricted to certain doors within a building
and this is done by assigning the user to one or more access
groups. When a user presents his token to a proximity
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
S e c t ion 5
reader, the user parameters are checked and if the user has a
matching access group assignment to the reader access group
assignment then access is granted.
The output used to operate the door strike will also need to
have the same access group assignment number so that it
operates at the same time. To restrict a user from accessing
doors outside specified times, create a timer group and assign
the user to the timer group.
Example:
Prox reader operating a door.
1)
Assign proximity reader 9 to an access group 1-8 say 4
2)
Set an output Event type=Access group and Index=4
3)
Assign user to access group 4, a user can belong to multiple
access groups to access multiple doors.
4)
Assign reader to area 0 and disable arm/disarm options
5)
Present token to reader to access door
Example:
Prox reader operating door and disarm Area 1.
1)
Assign proximity reader 9 to an access group 1-8 say 4
2)
Set an output Event type=Access group and Index=4
3)
Assign user to access group 4, a user can belong to multiple
access groups to access multiple doors.
4)
Assign reader to area 1, enable arming option
5)
Present token to reader to disarm, present token again to
release door.
Example:
Prox reader operating door and arm/disarm Area 1.
1)
Assign proximity reader 9 to an access group 1-8 say 4
2)
Set an output Event type=Access group and Index=4
3)
Assign user to access group 4, a user can belong to multiple
access groups to access multiple doors.
4)
Assign reader to area 1, enable arming/disarming and Badging
option.
5)
Present token to disarm, present token to release door, present
token 3 times to arm system.
5-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
User Default Table
Parameter
User 1
2580
User 1
1
Add PIN
Name
Area Assignment
User Options
Has Master PIN Privileges
Expire PIN Code
Is Arm Only Code
Can Bypass Zones
Can Auto Bypass Zones
Send ‘Open/Close’ Reports
Timer Group
Access Group
User 2 - 48
User 2 - 48
1
Y
Access > PIN Codes >
MENU 1-1-0
This command allows a user to change their own PIN. The
new PIN should have the same number of digits as the old PIN
unless the variable code length option has been enabled.
See MENU 1-5-0 — PIN Length.
1)
Y
Y
Y
--
Change Own PIN
Y
Y
Y
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will prompt you to
enter a new PIN.
Enter New PIN for
Debbie Smith Ur002
OK or MENU
Press ����������
Table 15: User Default Programming Options
2)
Enter the new PIN, then press [OK]. If the error message “PIN
Not Allowed” is displayed , press [OK] and try a different PIN.
3)
The keypad will now prompt you to confirm the new PIN again.
User PIN Codes
At factory default, each PIN is set to 4 digits in length. The
default PIN for User 1 (Master user) is 2580. Only the Installer
can change the PIN Length see MENU 1-5-0 — PIN Length.
Confirm New PIN for
Debbie Smith Ur002
••••
Press ����������
OK or MENU
Access > PIN Codes >
-
Erase User
MENU 1-0-0
This command allows the installer or a master code user, to
erase the user. When an installer erases a user, it will return
back to factory default all information relating to the following:
i
Note
 PIN
If you attempt to enter a new PIN which already exists the
system will display PIN Not Allowed. The next time the original
PIN holder disarms the system they will be notified that their PIN
code has been compromised. The compromised PIN message
will continue to be displayed until the original user changes
their PIN.
 Token ID
 RF Keyfob ID
 Name
Access > PIN Codes >
 Timer Group
Change Other PIN
 Access Group
 Area Assignment
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [0] + [0] and using the arrow keys
highlight the user to be erased then press [OK].
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
2)
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
MENU 1-1-1
This command allows the Installer or Master user to change
other user PINs. The Master User can only change PINs for
other users in the same area.
The new PIN should have the same number of digits as the old
PIN unless the variable code length option has been enabled.
See MENU 1-5-0 — PIN Length.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK].
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
Verify the user name to be erased and press [OK].
To abort press [MENU].
To Erase user Ur001
John Smith
OK or MENU
Press ����������
-
2)
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Enter the new PIN, then press [OK]. If the error message “PIN
Not Allowed” is displayed , press [OK] and try a different PIN.
Please Enter PIN for
Debbie Smith Ur002
••••
Press OK or MENU
3)
5-2
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
i
Note
If you attempt to enter a new PIN which already exists the
system will display PIN Not Allowed. The next time the original
PIN holder disarms the system they will be notified that their PIN
code has been compromised. The compromised PIN message
will continue to be displayed until the original user changes
their PIN.
Access > PIN Codes >
View PIN
Access > PIN Codes >
-
Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [4] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK].
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
MENU 1-1-2
This command allows the Installer or Master user to add a PIN
for a user that currently does not have a PIN assigned.
The Master user can only program a new PIN for users that
have been assigned to the same area(s) as the Master user.
1)
2)
User 6 Name
User 8 Name
User 10 Name
 OK or MENU
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
User Tokens
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Note
The PIN will always display 8 digits however only the number
of digits corresponding to the global PIN Length setting are
valid.
View PIN Ur001
Enter the new PIN, then press [OK]. If the error message “PIN
Not Allowed” is displayed , press [OK] and try a different PIN.
i
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
25800000
Press 0-9 ����������
OK to SAVE
Enter New PIN for
User 10 Name Ur010
••••
Press ����������
OK or MENU
3)
2)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [2] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that dont already have PINs assigned.
Ur006
Ur008
Ur010
Press
MENU 1-1-4
This menu allows the Installer to view the actual PIN for any
user.
1)
Add PIN

If you attempt to enter a new PIN which already exists the
system will display PIN Not Allowed. The next time the original
PIN holder disarms the system they will be notified that their PIN
code has been compromised. The compromised PIN message
will continue to be displayed until the original user changes
their PIN.
This section outlines how to add and delete tokens. Tokens
provide an alternate method for users to turn the system on
and off or operate a door strike.
A token is a plastic card that has a unique ID number. Each
user can be assigned a PIN as well as a Token for greater
flexibility.
A Token can be presented to a keypad with a built in reader or
to an external reader module to operate the system.
Tokens will follow all user settings.
Access > Token >
Access > PIN Codes >
-
Delete PIN
MENU 1-1-3
This menu allows security installers and Master Users the
ability to delete other users PINs. A Master user can only delete
a PIN for users that have been assigned to the same area(s). The
Installer and Master user cannot delete their own PIN.
1)
Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [3] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that can be deleted.
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
2)
-
Add Token
This command allows the Installer or Master User to assign
a Token ID for each user. Only one Token can be assigned to
each user. To change a Token for an existing user you will need
to first delete the old Token before adding the new one.
See MENU 1-2-1 — Delete Token
1)
Press OK to delete PIN
User Ur002 Debbie Smith
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that dont already have Tokens assigned.
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Press [OK] to delete the PIN or press [MENU] to cancel.
MENU 1-2-0
2)
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Swipe the token card past the reader. As you swipe the token,
the reader will sound a single beep to confirm that the token
has been learnt.
OK or MENU
Press ����������
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
5-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
User RF Keyfobs
To add token for Ur001
John Smith
Swipe New Token
Press ����������
OK or MENU
i
Note
This section outlines how to add and delete RF keyfobs. RF
Keyfobs provide an alternate method for users to turn the
system on and off.
If the Add Token command is initiated from a keypad that
does not have a built in reader, you will need to select a reader
from the list before proceeding. Swipe the Token at the selected
reader.
There are two methods for adding RF Keyfobs, Direct Entry
and Learn Mode. The system will prompt for the appropriate
method depending on the Receiver type fitted to the system.
The RF Keyfob must be compatible with the RF Receiver that
has been programmed in MENU 3-5-0 — Input Type.
Refer to MENU 6-2-2 — RF Device Options to configure the
following preferences for RF Keyfobs.
Access > Token >
-
Delete Token
 Audible RF Keyfob Panic,
MENU 1-2-1
 Report RF Keyfob Panic and
This command allows the Installer or Master User to delete
Token IDs which have been programmed into the system.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that have Tokens assigned to them.
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
2)
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
 RF Keyfob ‘Part On’ Arming Allowed.
RF Keyfobs will follow all user settings.
Access > RF Keyfob >
Press [OK] to delete the token or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
To delete token for Ur001
John Smith press OK
Keyfob Direct Entry Mode
1)
MENU 1-2-2
This command allows the Installer or Master User to identify
who a Token has been assigned to. You will need to have
the token in order to do the test. This command can only be
performed at a prox keypad.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [2]. The system will prompt you to
swipe the token to be checked.
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that dont already have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
Access > Token >
-
MENU 1-3-0
This menu allows the Installer or a Master User to assign an RF
Keyfob to a user. All users can have an RF Keyfob assigned if
required.
OK or MENU
Press ����������
Token Status
-
Add Keyfob
2)
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Enter the RF Keyfob ID Number.
Enter Keyfob RFid for
Ur002 Debbie Smith
009553507
Press�����������
OK or MENU
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Swipe token to be
identified
OK or MENU
Press ����������
2)
Present the token to the keypad, you will hear a confirmation
beep and the display will show the token status.
Token belongs to Ur002
Debbie Smith
OK or MENU
Press ����������
3)
5-4
To exit, press [OK] or [MENU].
Access > RF Keyfob >
Delete Keyfob
-
MENU 1-3-1
This command allows the Installer or a Master User to delete an
RF Keyfob ID that has been assigned to a user.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
John Smith
Debbie Smith
Mary Smith
 OK or MENU
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
2)
Press [OK] to delete the RF Keyfob ID number and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
OK to delete keyfob for
Ur002 Debbie Smith
009553507
Press�����������
OK or MENU
User Properties
This section outlines user properties including User Name, Area
Assignment, User Options, Erase User and Access Group.
Access > User Properties >
.
U
Keyfob Learn Mode
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that dont already have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
2)
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
-
User Name
s
e
r
N
a
m
e
This menu allows the security Installer or a Master user to
program the user’s name (max of 16 characters). This name
is used for System Greetings, Reporting and Log entries to
identify the user by name.
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK].
1)
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
Press a button on the RF Keyfob.
Enter Keyfob RFid for
Ur002 Debbie Smith
Press Keyfob Button
Press�����������
OK or MENU
1
MENU 1-4-0
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Use the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the User Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you
can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor
position to the end of the line.
2)
User Name Ur001
Access > RF Keyfob >
Test Keyfob

MENU 1-3-2
This menu allows the installer to test the RF Keyfob operation.
Key the transmitter a number of times and the display will
show the number of transmissions received and a signal level
of GOOD, BAD or AVERAGE.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [2] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will
only list users that have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
2)
User 1 Name
Press� 
i
Area Assignment
Press any key on the transmitter you wish to test.
If the system receives the signal the following screen will
appear.
Ur002 Debbie Smith
Transmissions = 001
Signal = Average
Press�����������
OK or MENU
4)
Repeat step 2 as required and then Press [OK] to exit
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Access > Global Properties >
Ur002 Debbie Smith
Waiting for Trigger
3)
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 5 — Programming
Note
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
OK or MENU
Press�����������
-
MENU 1-4-1
1
Area 1
Y
2
Area 2
N
3
Area 3
N
4
Area 4
N
5
Area 5
N
6
Area 6
N
7
Area 7
N
8
Area 8
N
This menu allows the Installer or Master User to program which
areas (1 to 8) other users can access. Each user can be assigned
to one or multiple areas.
The Master user is restricted and can only assign other users
to any one or multiple areas that the Master user has been
assigned to. At factory default, each user is assigned to
operate Area 1.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the User in the list then press [OK].
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
OK or MENU
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
5-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
2)
 Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Send Open/Close Reports
Setting this option will cause the system to send opening and closing
reports when the user arms and disarms an area.
Repeat Step 2 until you have assigned the user to all required
areas, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
3)
Access > User Properties >
User Option

MENU 1-4-2
1
Has Master Code Privileges
Y
2
Expire PIN Code
N
3
Is Arm Only Code
N
4
Can Bypass Zones
Y
5
Can Auto Bypass Zones
Y
6
Send Open / Close Reports
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
The above options are programmable per User.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [2] and select the user from the list
then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
 Master User
PIN Expires
Arm ONly
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
will prompt the user to automatically bypass each faulted zone. To
prevent users from being able to force arm an area you will need to
disable this option.
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Has Master PIN Code Privileges
Setting this option assigns the user as Master User. Master Users have
have access to additional commands for administering the system.
Non-Master Users have limited access to menu options. See the
Menu Referrence Table in Section 5 for a list of available Master User
commands.
Expire PIN Code
Setting this option will cause the User PIN to expire after the time
period set in Menu 1-5-3 — PIN Expire Time. The time will reset each
time the user PIN operates the system. Valid times are from 1 to 255
Days. Setting the time to 0 will prevent the code from expiring. To
reactivate an expired PIN simply enter a new PIN for the User.
Is Arm Only Code
Setting this option restricts the Users PIN code to only turn an area on.
The PIN code has no access to turn an area off or reset an alarm.
Can Bypass Zones
Setting this option allows the User to manually bypass and un-bypass
zones.
Can Auto Bypass Zones
Understanding Timer Groups
Timer Groups are used to restrict users from operating doors
outside given times, days or holidays. To do this you need to
create a time group, then assign one or more schedules to the
time group to specify the access period, day of the week and
holidays. To now restrict the user, they must belong also to the
same timer group. This now restricts the user from accessing
the system outside the nominated times and days within the
schedules linked to the timer group.
User
Can only belong to 1 timer group.
Schedules
Multiple schedules can be linked to the same timer group.
Timer Groups
There are 8 different timer groups available.
Timer Group Example
1)
To set up a timer group you need to select an unused timer
group number from 1 to 8, in this example we will assume
timer group number to be 5.
2)
Select an unused schedule and program the times and day of
the week then assign the schedule to timer group 5
3)
Then under user properties assign the users who you wish to
restrict to timer group 5. Remember that you are only able to
assign a user to one access group.
A master code holder is able to change the schedules so they
can change the access times for a given user. If a user tries to
operate the system outside their assigned timer group periods
then access will be denied.
Access > User Properties >
-
Timer Group
MENU 1-4-4
0
This menu is used to assign a User to a Timer Group. Timer
Groups can be used to restrict User access to be within specific
times defined by schedules. Each User can only be assigned to
one Timer Group. Setting this option to 0 will give the User 24
hour access to the system.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [4] and select the user from the list
then press [OK].
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Setting this option allows the User to to turn the area on, even though
one or more zones are still faulted or open. Upon arming, the system
5-6
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
Variable pin lengths are useful for increasing security levels.
Another use would be to program a single digit code to trigger
an output. To do this create a code which is not assigned to an
area and then map this to the required output.
Using the numeric keys, enter the Timer Group. Valid entries
are 1 – 8 or 0 to disable.
2)
Timer Group Ur001
00
Press���������������
0-9 OK to SAVE
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current PIN length.
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
3)
PIN Length
04 - 4 Digit Length
Press���������������
0-9 OK to SAVE
Access > User Properties >
-
Access Assignment
MENU 1-4-5
1
Access Group 1
N
2
Access Group 2
N
3
Access Group 3
N
4
Access Group 4
N
5
Access Group 5
N
6
Access Group 6
N
7
Access Group 7
N
8
Access Group 8
N
This menu allows you to assign each user to one or more
access groups. An access group is used to allow and/or restrict
which users have access to various system outputs. These
outputs can be used to control door strikes etc.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [5] and select the user from the list
then press [OK].
Ur001
Ur002
Ur003
Press
2)
John Smith
Debbie Smith
User 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Select the required PIN length using the up and down arrow
keys then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Access > Global Properties >
PIN Retry Count

MENU 1-5-1
6
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu sets how many times an invalid PIN can be entered
before the keypad will be quarantined or locked out.
See MENU 6-1-8 — Keypad Lockout Time to set the lockout
time period.
An Access Denied report will be sent to the base station when
the keypad is quanrantined. If keypad lockout is not required
set this option to 0.
The PIN retry count is reset every time the corresponding area
is turned All On, Part On or Off.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current PIN retry count.
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the Access Group
then press the [ON] key to select or the [OFF] key to deselect.
 Access Group 1
Access Group 2
Access Group 3
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
2)
PIN Retry Count
06
Press���������������
0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Repeat Step 2 until all required Access Groups are
programmed, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU]
to exit without saving.
Enter the required PIN Retry Count using the up and down
arrow keys then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving. Valid entries are 1 - 15 , 0 = Unlimited.
Access > Global Properties >
Installer PIN
Access > Global Properties >
PIN Length

MENU 1-5-0
4
0 = Variable
1 = 1 Digit
4 = 4 Digits
7 = 7 Digits
2 = 2 Digits
5 = 5 Digits
8 = 8 Digits
3 = 3 Digits
6 = 6 Digits
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
At factory default, all User PINs are set to be 4 digits long. This
menu allows you to change the length for all PIN codes.
If you select the Variable code length option then you are free
to create pin codes with different code lengths. For example
User 1 could have a 4 digit code while user 3 can have an 8
digit code.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1
2
3
MENU 1-5-2
4
This menu sets the Installer PIN. The Installer can access all
menu functions and can also disarm one or multiple areas. The
Installer PIN Can Be Up To 8 Digits Long.
The factory default Installer PIN is 1234.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Installer PIN.
Installer PIN
1234
Press� 0-9 OK to SAVE
5-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
2)
Enter the required PIN Retry Count using the up and down
arrow keys then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Access > Prox Reader >
Area Assignment

MENU 1-6-1
1
Access > Global Properties >
PIN Expire Time

MENU 1-5-3
0
3
0
DAYS
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu programs which area (1 to 8) the Reader will operate. Each
external reader can only be assigned to operate a single area.
When using a prox keypad reader, if you set the area assignment to
a specific area number then only that area will arm / disarm when a
valid token is used.
This menu programs how many days PINs that have been
programmed to expire, will be able to operate the system.
Every time a valid temporary code is used, the Expire Time
counter will restart.
If you set the area assignment to 0 (zero), and a token is presented
then the keypad will move to the first area which that user has
access to. If the same token is presented a second time then the area
currenttly in focus will arm or disarm.
To renew a temporary user, the Installer or Master user
must reprogram the PIN. The PIN Expire Time is global for all
temporary PIN users.
If the user wants to arm / disarm a different area which they have
access to, then after swiping their token the first time, they can use
the left and right arrow keys to move to the desired area and then
swipe their token a second time to operate.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current PIN Expire Time.
PIN Expire Time
030 Days
Press���������������
0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Enter the new PIN Expire Time using the numeric keys.
Valid entries are 0 - 255 days.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
If the user wants to arm / disarm all areas they belong to, then after
swiping their token once, they can press and hold the [ON] key to arm
or the [OFF] key to disarm all areas they belong to.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [1] and select the Reader from the
list and press [OK].
2)
Select the required Area using the up and down arrow keys
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Area Assignment R001
01 - Area 1
Press���������������
0-9 OK to SAVE
Prox Readers
Access > Prox Reader >
Name
R
e

a
d
e
r
1
N
a
m
MENU 1-6-0
e
This menu allows you to program the name or location
description of the prox reader. Up to 10 different Readers can
be used on the Solution 64. This can comprise of 8 keypads
with built-in Readers and 2 additional Readers connected via
an optional CM110 Output Expander module.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [0] and select the Reader from the
list and press [OK].
Name R001
Reader 1 Name
Press� 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Use the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the Reader Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time
you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current
cursor position to the end of the line.
i
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
i
The keypad display will return back to its home area if no keys
are pressed or tokens are presented for 60 seconds.
Note
Access > Prox Reader >
Access Group

MENU 1-6-2
0
This menu is used to assign a Prox Reader to an Access Group
(1 to 8). Access Groups are used to restrict user access to doors.
Each reader can be assigned to only one access group.
Each Reader can only be assigned to one Access Group. Setting
this option to 0 means the reader will not operate any system
outputs.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [2] and select the Reader from the
list then press [OK].
2)
Select the required Access Group using the up and down arrow
keys then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Access Group R001
Note
00 - No Access Group
Press���������������
0-9 OK to SAVE
5-8
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
To Arm In Part Mode
Access > Prox Reader >
Reader Options

MENU 1-6-3
1
Arming Allowed
2
Disarming Allowed
Y
3
Badging Required
N
4
Zero Exit Time
N
5
Part On Badging
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Present the token three times within 5 seconds and the area will arm
in Part Mode 2.
Y
i
Note
Part Mode 2 can only be activated if there are zone
programmed for Part Mode 2. See MENU 3-0-4 — Set Part 2
Zones.
» » E N D
1)
Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [3] and select the Reader from the
list then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
O F
S E C T I O N « «
 Arming Allowed
 Disarming Allowed
Badging Allowed
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all Reader options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Arming Allowed
Selecting this option allows the prox reader to arm the area that it
is assigned to when a valid token is presented. The User must have
access to the Area that the Reader has been assigned to.
See MENU 1-6-1 — Reader Area Assignment
Disarming Allowed
Selecting this option allows the prox reader to disarm the area that
it is assigned when a valid token is presented. The User must have
access to the Area that the Reader has been assigned to.
See MENU 1-6-1 — Reader Area Assignment.
Badging Required
Selecting this option allows the user to unlock a door and arm an Area
from a single reader. This option is only relevant if Arming Allowed has
been selected.
When the area is disarmed, presenting the Token once will unlock the
door. Presenting the Token 3 times within 5 seconds will arm the Area.
When the area is armed, presenting the Token once will disarm the
area. Presenting the Token a second time will unlock the door.
Zero Exit Time
Selecting this option allow the User to arm the area from the reader
with no exit time.
Part On Badging
Selecting this option allows the user to arm the area using their token
in Part On and Part 2 On modes. This funtion is only available at Prox
enabled Keypads.
To Arm In All On Mode
From the disarmed state, present the token once to fully arm the area.
To Arm In Part Mode
Present the token twice within 5 seconds and the area will arm in Part
Mode.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
5-9
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Access Programming
This page left intentionally blank
5-10
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

The Solution 64 has 8 different areas each with its own specific
programmable options.
Under the commands menu you can interrogate the status of
an area, turn chime mode on/off, move to an area or arm and
disarm a specific area.
S e c t ion 6
Area Programming
Example: Simple Two Area System
1) Assign zones to area 1 and area 2
2) Assign the home areas for the keypads
3) Assign users to areas
The customer account number is programmable for each
individual area as well as input, output and general options.
Each time you are presented with an option that is area
specific, the menu will prompt you to specify the area first.
4) Set outputs to operate individually or common for all areas.
Partitioning
The Solution–64 control system can be partitioned into 8
individual areas. Each area has its own individual properties
which determine how the area operates. The default name for
AREA-1 is “Security System” and it can be changed to any other
name using the area properties menu. All zones and users
are assigned to AREA-1 so no assigning of users or zones is
required for non partitioned systems by default.
Code to Change areas or just arrow key
Which keypads to display area icons
Reset Sirens by any user on any area
To create an area, assign one or more zones to the area of your
choice. A zone can only belong to one area and any number
of zones can belong to a single area. Each area operates
independently from other areas as if it were another security
panel and there are numerous options available to tailor
just how the entire system should operate. If you require a
common area that automatically arms when all other areas are
armed, and disarms as soon as any other area is disarmed, then
Area 1 can be set as a common area. To make area 1 a common
area, set the option under MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options.
All keypads connected to the system have the ability to display
the arm/disarm condition of every area at the same time using
the area icons on the display. This is selectable per keypad
under MENU 6-1-4 — General Options.
Once you log onto a keypad using your pin code + OK the
system knows who you are and will allow you to use the left
arrow key to move from the current area to the next area that
your assigned to. To move areas without having to enter your
code select the option under MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options
and then simply step through all the available areas using
the arrow keys. Each keypad is assigned a home area and will
automatically revert back to this area after 60 seconds.
The system outputs must be configured to operate for their
corresponding areas. The external siren, internal siren and
strobe outputs are defaulted to output index 1 and will operate
for area 1. If you want the output to operate for multiple areas
then the output index needs to be set to 0.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
5) Set account code for each area
6) Set options,
Area Commands
Areas > Commands >
---
Area Status
MENU 2-0-0
This command allows you to view the condition of any area
in the system. In the following example Area 1 has the name
“Security System” and it is currently in the Disarmed State.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [0] and select the area to view and
press [OK].
Security System A001
Disarmed
OK or MENU
Press ����������
Areas > Commands >
Turn Area On/Off
--
MENU 2-0-1
This command allows you to turn on or off areas. If an area
has already been turned All On or Part On, a ‘tick’ () will be
displayed on the right side of the area name.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [1] and select the area and press [OK]
to change the current state.
A001 Security System 
A002 Area 2 Name
A003 Area 3 Name 
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
6-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Area Programming
A001 Security System
A002 Area 2 Name
A003 Area 3 Name
Press  OK or MENU
Areas > Commands >
--
Turn All Areas On
MENU 2-0-2
This command allows you to turn on all areas that your PIN
has been assigned to at the same time. An alternative method
for arming all areas is to enter your PIN then press an hold the
[ON] key for 2 seconds.
1)
2)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [2]. The keypad will display the exit
time bar to prompt you to exit all areas. You should leave all
areas now.
When exit time has expired, the keypad will display that all
areas are turned All On (Armed).
i
Note
Turn off option Menu 6-1-4, Pin To change Area and use the [←]
and [→] keys to move through all areas on the system without
the need to enter your pin.
Areas > Commands >
---
Chime On/Off
MENU 2-0-5
Chime mode allows you to monitor a zone (or group of zones)
by sounding the keypad buzzer or activating a programmable
output. This can be useful when you need to monitor the front
or back entrance to a premises while in the disarmed state.
Area 1 Name
EXIT NOW
To select which zones will be monitored for chime see Menu 30-3 — Set Chime Zones.
1)
i
Note
The Display Area Icons option is programmable per keypad. If
Security System A001
Chime is OFF
To turn ON, Press ON
To Go Back Press OK
this option has not been selected then Area icons 1 to 8 will not
be displayed. See Menu 6-1-4 — Display Area Icons.
Areas > Commands >
Turn All Areas Off
--
MENU 2-0-3
This command allows you to turn off all areas that your PIN has
been assigned to at the same time. This command cannot be
accessed from a keypad that is in the armed state.
i
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [3] to disarm all areas.
2)
An alternative method for disarming all areas is to enter your
PIN then press an hold the [OFF] key for 2 seconds.
Areas > Commands >
-
Area Properties
Areas > Area Properties >
-
MENU 2-0-4
1)
An alternative method for changing the current area being
displayed is to enter your PIN and then press the left or right
arrow keys. Keep pressing the arrow key until the desired area
is displayed. Only areas which have been assigned to the PIN
will be available for view.
If you move to another area the keypad will automatically
revert back to its assigned home area after 2 minutes. See
Menu 6-1-3, Home Area.
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [4] and select the area from the list
and press [OK] to move to the selected area.
r
e
a
1
N
a
m
MENU 2-1-0
e
This menu allows you to program the name for each area. Each
area name can be programmed with up to 16 characters. At
factory default, only Area 1 is used. The Solution control panel
can have a maximum of 8 independent areas programmed.
Each keypad on the system can opererate any area however
you can only operate the area which is currently being
displayed. The Move to Area command allows you to change
the current keypad view from one area to another.
6-2
sound the chime tone. See Menu 6-1-5 — Chime Tone
Note
A
Move To Area
The Chime Tone will only be heard on keypads programmed to
Area Name
1)
1)
To turn chime mode On or Off enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [5]
and select the area from the list then press [OK].
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [0] and select the area from the list
and press [OK].
Area Name A001
Security System
Press  OK to SAVE
2)
Use the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the Area Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you
can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor
position to the end of the line.
i
See Alpha Text section in Section 4 - Programming Overview for
further detail on entering alpha text.
Note
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Area Programming
Single Button Arming Allowed – All On
Areas > Properties >
General Options

MENU 2-1-1
1
Exit Time Restart
N
2
Reset Alarm Memory On Disarm
N
3
Duress Allowed
N
4
Acknowledge All Faults
N
5
Single Button Arming - All On
Y
6
Single Button Arming - Part On
Y
7
Link To Common Area
Y
8
Single Button Part Off
N
The above options are programmable per area.
1)
2)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [1] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
Exit Time Restart
Reset Alarm Memory
 Duress Allowed
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
This option allows users to simply press the ON key to turn the area
ON. All zones being armed must be sealled. If open and close reports
are programmed, the user ID number will report as 000.
Single Button Arming Allowed – Part On
This option allows users to simply press the Part On key to turn the
area Part On. All zones in the being armed must be sealled. If open
and close reports in Part Mode are programmed, the user ID number
will report as 000.
Link To Common Area
This option causes the selected area or areas to control the common
area. If this option is not selected for an area then it will be able to
operate independant of the common area. See MENU 7-7-1 — Area
Options to enable the common area.
Single Button Part Off
This option allows users to disarm from Part Mode or Part Mode 2
simply by pressing the OFF key. This function will only work if there
are no alarms in effect, and the entry timer is not running.
Areas > Properties >
Input Options
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Exit Time Restart
The exit delay timer will restart (once per arming cycle) when the
same entry/exit delay zone is faulted a second time during exit delay
(eg. If an entry/exit delay zone is unsealled, restored and unsealled a
second time during exit delay = exit time restart).
Reset Alarm Memory On Disarm
Clears all alarm memories displayed on the keypad when a user
has turned the corresponding area off. If this option is not set,
alarm memory will continue to display until the user has turned the
corresponding area ‘on’ again.
Acknowledge All Faults
Non Sequential Handover (Entry Path)
2
Pulse Count Handover Allowed
Y
3
Senior Watch
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Y
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [2] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
 Non Sequential
 Pulse Count H/Over
Senior Watch
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
To trigger the duress alarm enter your PIN then repeat the last two
digits of your PIN before pressing [ON], [OFF], or [OK] key.
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is on,
Enter, [2] + [5] + [8] + [0] + [8] + [0] + [OFF].
1
1)
If a user is being forced to turn off the security system under duress
they can disarm the system and initiate a silent duress alarm.
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is off,
Enter, [2] + [5] + [8] + [0] + [8] + [0] + [OK] or [ON].
MENU 2-1-2
The above options are programmable per area.
Duress Allowed
Example:

3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Non Sequential Handover
With Non-Sequential entry path you can trigger handover zones in
any order provided that an entry delay zone was triggered first.
If this option has been programmed, the control panel will force a
user to acknowledge each trouble condition even though the trouble
condition has already cleared.
If this option is not programmed, handover zones must be triggered
in numerical sequence provided that an entry delay zone was
triggered first.
If this option is not programmed, any trouble condition that occurs
will not have to be acknowledged if it has already been rectified or
cleared.
If a handover zone is triggered before an entry delay zone is triggered
an instant alarm will occur.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
6-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Area Programming
Pulse Count Handover Allowed
Arm/Disarm Speaker Beeps Via Keyswitch
This option allows zones from the same area that have both pulse
count and pulse count time programmed the ability to hand over
pulses to other pulse count zones during their respective pulse count
time. Only zones that have an active pulse count time can accept
pulse count handover from another zone.
This option allows audible beeps via the speaker output to verify to
the user that they have successfully turned the area On or Off using
a Keyswitch. The speaker output will sound One beep for Off, two
beeps for On.
Siren / Strobe When Part On Allowed
Burglary delay zones can only handover pulses to other burglary
delay zones. Burglary instant and/or handover zones can handover
pulses to other burglary instant and/or handover zones. 24 hour
non-fire zone types can only handover pulses to other 24 hour non
fire zones. A 24-hour fire zone can only handover pulses to another
24-hour fire zone.
This option allows the strobe and audible alarms to operate when the
system is turned Part On or Part 2 On mode.
Alarm On PIN Retry Violations
When the PIN Retry Count as programmed in Menu 1-5-1 is reached
an audible alarm will occur.
Senior Watch
This option requires at least one burglary zone in the corresponding
area to be faulted and restored during the senior watch time. If no
burglary zone has register during the senior watch time, the keypad
will sound an alarm.
Alarm On Exit Error
This option allows you to sound an alarm when an exit error occurs.
To warn the user that senior watch time is about to expire, the keypad
will sound the auto arm pre-alert time (if programmed) prior to
sounding the alarm. See MENU 7-2-6 — Senior Watch Time.
An exit error occurs when an entry/exit delay zone becomes unsealled
during exit delay time and remains unsealled at the end of exit delay
time. If this happens, the entry delay will start. If the area is not
turned off (disarmed) before the entry delay time expires an alarm will
occur.
This feature is not applicable when the corresponding area is turned
All On.
Alarm On Keyswitch Tamper
An output (Output Event Type 51) can be programmed to operate as
follow Senior Watch if required.
This option allows you to sound an alarm when a tamper condition
occurs on a zone programmed as a Keyswitch Zone.
Refer to Menu 3-1-1 — Zone Type in Section 8 - Input Programming
for information on programming zones to be a keyswitch input.
Areas > Properties >
Output Options

MENU 2-1-3
Areas > Properties >
Reporting Options

MENU 2-1-4
1
Arm/Disarm Speaker Beeps Via RF Keyfob
Y
2
Arm/Disarm Speaker Beeps Via Keyswitch
Y
1
Report PIN Retry
3
Siren / Strobe When Part On Allowed
Y
2
Report Exit Error
Y
Smart Lockout
N
Y
4
Alarm On PIN Retry Violations
Y
3
5
Alarm On Exit Error
N
4
Reserved
N
Cancel Reports
Y
6
Alarm On Keyswitch Tamper ( Only If System Armed)
Y
5
7
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
N
7
Open / Close Reports For Part On
N
8
Open / Close Reports Only After Alarm
N
8
Reserved
The above options are programmable per area.
1)
2)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [3] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
 SPK
 SPK
 SPK
Press
3)
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [4] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
Beeps Keyfob
Beeps Key/SW
Strobe Part ON
 OK ON OFF MENU
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Arm/Disarm Speaker Beeps Via RF Key Fob
This option allows audible beeps via the speaker output to verify to
the user that they have successfully turned the area On or Off using
the RF keyfob. The speaker output will sound One beep for Off, two
beeps for On and three beeps for Part On.
6-4
The above options are programmable per area.
 Report PIN Retry
 Report Exit Error
Smart Lockout
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Report PIN Retry
When the PIN Retry Count as programmed in Menu 1-5-1 is reached a
Wrong Code Entry alarm report will be sent to the Control Room.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Area Programming
Report Exit Error
Silent Burglary Alarm
This option allows the system to report and Exit Error Alarm.
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when a silent
burglary zone has triggered an alarm.
An exit error occurs when an entry/exit delay zone becomes unsealled
during exit delay time and remains unsealled at the end of exit delay
time. If this happens, the entry delay will start. If the area is not
turned off (disarmed) before the entry delay time expires an Exit Error
alarm report will be sent.
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when a zone
programmed as fire (audible or silent) has triggered an alarm.
Arm/Disarm Flash Via RF Keyfob
Smart Lockout
Smart lockout allows and previously locked zones to reactivate during
the siren run time when a new alarm event occurs.
Cancel Reports
When set, a Cancel report will be sent if a user disarms the area before
the siren timer expires.
Open/Close Reports For Part On
When set, the panel will Send Open or Close reports when the system
is armed in Part On mode.
When slected, the panel will activate the strobe output for six seconds
when a user turns the area on via an RF Key fob. This provides silent
feedback to the user that the signal has been received.
Arm/Disarm Flash Via Keyswitch or PGM Input
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output for six
seconds when a user turns the area on via a Keyswitch Input or the
Programmable Input. This provides silent feedback to the user that
the signal has been received.
24-Hour Alarm
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when a zone
programmed as 24-hour (audible or silent) has registered an alarm.
Zones programmed as 24-Hour Hold-Up are not included.
Open/Close Reports Only After Alarm
When set, the panel will send a single Open / Close report if a
previous alarm has occured. This report will be sent for all users
regardless of whether or not they have been programmed to send
Open/Close reports.
Area Reporting
Areas > Properties >
Strobe Trigger
Fire Alarm

MENU 2-1-5
1
Audible Burglary Alarm
Y
2
Silent Burglary Alarm
N
3
Fire Alarm
Y
4
Arm / Disarm Flash Via RF Keyfob
N
5
Arm / Disarm Flash Via Keyswitch or PGM Input
N
6
Reserved
N
7
24-Hour Alarm
Y
8
Reserved
N
Programming any of these options allow the strobe output to
operate when the corresponding event occurs. The strobe light
must be connected to an output programmed as a Event Type
48 for it to operate. See Section 9 — output Programming for
more Information on output event types.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [5] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
 Audible Burglary Alarm
Silent Burglary Alarm
 Fire Alarm
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Areas > Reporting >
Account Dest 1

0
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Audible Burglary Alarm
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when an
audible burglary zone has triggered an alarm.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The area account number identifies which control panel is
reporting to the security company’s base station receiver. Each
destination can have a different account number programmed.
The number should be entered from left to right with trailing
zeros.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [0] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the new account number. Use
the up and down arrows to select special characters BCDEF.
Account Dest 1 A001
1604000000
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Areas > Reporting >
Account Dest 2
MENU 2-2-1
0
3)
0
MENU 2-2-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The area account number identifies which control panel is
reporting to the security company’s base station receiver. Each
destination can have a different account number programmed.
The number should be entered from left to right with trailing
zeros.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [1] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
6-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Area Programming
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the new account number. Use
the up and down arrows to select special characters BCDEF.
Areas > Area Testing >
User Test Interval

MENU 2-9-1
Account Dest 2 A001
0
1604000000
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3)
0
0
DAYS
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu sets the number of days before it will prompt the
user to walk test the system. To clear the trouble condition, you
will need to perform the ‘Walk Test’ function.
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current number of weeks between User Test intervals.
Areas > Reporting >
Open / Close Route

MENU 2-2-2
User Test Interval
1
0 = Report Events To Log Only
000 Days
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
1 = Report Events To Destination 1 + Log
2 = Report Events To Destination 2 + Log
3 = Report Events To Destination 1 & Destination 2 + Log
4 = Report Events To Destination 2 If Destination 1 Fails + Log
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the number of days between
each user test interval. Valid entries are 1 – 255 Days or 000 to
disable.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
This menu programs the destination for open and close
reports. Only one option can be programmed in this menu.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [2] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
2)
Use the numeric keys 0-9 or the up and down arrow keys to
sellect the desired option.
Areas > Area Testing >
Service Interval

0
Open/Close Route A001
Area Testing
Areas > Area Testing >

MENU 2-9-0
0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1
2
1)
Service Interval
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [0] . The keypad will display the
current number of weeks programmed for area watch.
052 Weeks
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the number of weeks between
each user Service Interval. Valid entries are 1 – 255 Weeks or
000 to disable.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Area Watch
012 Weeks
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the number of weeks that an
area can remain turned off betore a trouble condition will
occur. Valid entries are 1 – 255 Weeks or 000 to disable.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
6-6
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current number of weeks between user test intervals.
WEEKS
This menu programs the number of weeks (001 – 255 weeks /
000 = disabled) an area can remain disarmed before registering
an ‘Inactivity Interval’ report. A restore signal will be sent when
the area is next armed and the exit time expires.
1)
2
This menu sets the number of weeks between service intervals.
When a service interval is due, a trouble condition will display
on the keypad to remind the customer that a system check is
required by the security company. When viewing the trouble
condition, the keypad will display ‘Call For Service’. To clear the
trouble condition, the installer must enter and exit installer’s
programming mode.
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Area Watch
5
WEEKS
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
01-Dest 1 + Log
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3)
MENU 2-9-2
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Area Programming
Areas > Area Testing >
Test Options

MENU 2-9-3
1
User Test Required
Y
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Walk Test Reports
Y
7
Walk Test 24-Hour Zones
N
8
Walk Test Fire Zones
N
The above options are programmable per area.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [3] and select the area from the list
then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
 User Test Required
Reserved
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
User Test Required
This option allows the keypad assigned to the corresponding area
to display a trouble condition when a user test is due. The trouble
condition can be cleared by performing a walk test.
Walk Test Reports
This option allows the corresponding area to send Walk Test reports
when a user enters/exits walk test mode and test zones.
Walk Test 24-Hour Zones
This option allows any 24-hour (non-fire) zone assigned to the
corresponding area to be tested during walk test.
Walk Test Fire Zones
This option allows 24-hour fire zone assigned to the corresponding
area to be tested during walk test.
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
6-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Area Programming
This page left intentionally blank
6-8
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 7
Input Programming
The Solution 64 is capable of controlling up to 64 inputs in
either hardwire or wireless configuration. Each input can have
its own unique name up to 16 characters to identify it on the
system for display and reporting purposes.
Under the commands menu you are able to view the status of
any input, bypass a zone, define which zones will operate in
chime mode, define which zones operate in part 2 mode and
reset smoke detectors.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [0] and select the zone you want to
view from the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can
directly enter the zone number to view then press [OK].
2)
The keypad will display the zone status and EOL resistance
value.
Zone 1 Name Zn001
EOL=Normal 06523 Ohms
There is a command called Zone Array that allows the installer
to view the condition of inputs in banks of 16. This is extremely
helpful when commissioning a system or fault finding.
There are numerous configurations for each hardwire input.
The end of line resistor can be configured to eliminate the
need to change the end of line resistors on a job when doing
a change over. Input zones can be setup as alarm only, alarm +
tamper or even split end of line.
For normally open contacts the system is wired exactly the
same as for normally closed but there is an option provided
that inverts the sealed state of a zone.
When arming the system, all zones will be tested by default
and you may wish to turn this option off for certain zones so
that you don’t continually alert the operator during arming.
The sensor watch feature lets you monitor zones to ensure
that they are working and detecting movement within a
determined programmable period.
Zones by default can be bypassed and you should disable
this option for zones you don’t want to be able to bypass, for
example 24hr, fire, holdup or panic zone types.
The PGM input is a special input that can be configured
to accept data from a number of different RF receiver
manufacturers or simply be used as an keyswitch input.
The tamper options configure the system behaviour for
enclosure tamper alarms and also for the enclosure tamper of
the peripheral devices.
Input Command s
Press OK or MENU
3)
Press the [OK] key to exit.
Inputs > Commands >
Zone Array

MENU 3-0-1
This menu allows you to view zones in groups of sixteen. The
top two rows of the display show the zone number, the third
row displays the zone status
N= NORMAL
S = SHORTED
A= ALARM
T= TAMPER
- = DISABLED
If a 100 is displayed at the right hand side of the top line, it
means that you are displaying zones 97 to 112 or zones 113 to
128. See example.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to select the zone group to view.
2)
Use the up and down arrows at any time to move to a new
group. The keypad will display the following zone array
information for Zones 1 to 16.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NSA-ANAT-------Press  OK or MENU
Inputs > Commands >
Zone Status
---
MENU 3-0-0
This menu allows you to view the zone status of each zone (i.e.
Normal, Alarm or Tamper).
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
In the above example screen,
N = Zone 01 and 06 are Normal (Sealed)
S = Zone 02 is Shorted
A = Zone 03,05,07 are in Alarm (Unsealed)
T = Zone 08 is in Tamper Alarm (Unsealed)
- = Zone 04, 09-16 are Disabled (Unused)
7-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
3)
The keypad will display the following zone array information
for Zones 97 to 112.
9990000000000111 1
7890123456789012 0
---------------- 0
Press  OK or MENU
4)
The keypad will display the following zone array information
for Zones 113 to 128.
1111111222222222 1
3456789012345678 0
---------------- 0
Press  OK or MENU
5)
Inputs > Commands >
This menu allows you to program zones to be monitored when
chime mode is activated. Chime mode is ideal for monitoring
a front door in a shop, a pool gate or other entrance points.
To sound the keypad buzzer when a chime zone is opened
(faulted) See MENU 6-1-5 — Beeper Options. To activate
Chime mode enter PIN + [MENU], select the Commands option
and use the arrow keys to scroll to the Chime On/Off menu.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [3] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the area from the list then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the zone(s) you
want to program as Chime Zones then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly then
press [OK]. A tick mark displayed on the right side of the zone
name indicates that the zone is already set for chime.
Inputs > Commands >
--
MENU 3-0-2
Zn001
Zn002
Zn003
Press
This menu allows users with the appropriate access level to
manually bypass zones effectively removing them from the
area for the current arming cycle. All zone types including
24hour zones can be bypassed.Bypassed zones will be reset
when the area is turned off or disarmed.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [2]. A list of zones that can be
bypassed will display on the keypad. A tick displayed on the
right side of the zone name indicates that the zone is already
bypassed.
Zn001
Zn002
Zn003
Press
2)
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
 OK
3)
Using the up and down arrow keys highlight the zone that you
want to bypass, then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter
the zone number that you want to bypass, then press [OK]. If
the zone is bypassed, the keypad will prompt:
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
 OK
Name 
Name
Name
or MENU
One of the following messages will be displayed depending on
the current zone programming.
Zone 1 Name Zn001
Zone Chime is OFF
To turn ON, Press ON
To Go Back Press OK
Name 
Name
Name
or MENU
Zone 1 Name Zn001 is
bypassed. To un-bypass
Press OFF.
Press OK or MENU
3)
MENU 3-0-3
Chime mode only works when the area is disarmed.
When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Bypass Zones
-
Set Chime Zones
Zone 1 Name Zn001
Zone Chime is ON
To turn OFF, Press OFF
To Go Back Press OK
4)
Press [ON] or [OFF] to toggle the zone to be monitored when
Chime Mode is turned on then press [OK] to save and exit or
[MENU] to exit without saving.
If the zone is not bypassed, the keypad will prompt:
Zone 1 Name Zn001 is
un-bypassed. To bypass,
Press ON.
Press OK or MENU
4)
Press [ON] or [OFF] to toggle the zone(s) bypass state then
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
5)
Repeat steps 1 to 4 to bypass or un-bypass additional zones.
7-2
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
4)
Inputs > Commands >
-
Set Part 2 Zones
2)
5)
Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [4] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the area from the list then press [OK].
Press [OFF] to disarm the zone in Part 2 mode or press [OK] to
exit.
Main Bedroom Zn002
Is a armed in PART2
To remove, Press OFF
To Go Back Press OK
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the zone(s) that you
want to disable in Part 2, then press [OK]. Alternatively, you
can enter the zone number directly then press [OK]. Zones
marked with a tick are active and will alarm in Part 2 mode.
Zn001
Zn002
Zn003
Press
3)
Front Door Zn001
Is not armed in PART2
To Enable, Press ON,
To Go Back Press OK
MENU 3-0-4
This menu allows you to program which zones are to be
exluded or bypassed when an area has been turned On in Part
Mode 2.
1)
Press [ON] to arm the zone in Part 2 mode or press [OK] to exit.
Front Door 
Main Bedroom
Lounge Window 
 OK or MENU
One of the following messages will be displayed depending on
the current zone programming.
Zone Default Table
The table below lists the default values for all zone parameters in the Solution 64. By default, zones 5 to 16 are set as Instant zones
and zones 17 to 64 are set as Not Used. Zones marked as Not Used do not require EOL resistors to be fitted.
Programming Option
Zone Name
Zone Type
Area Assignment
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Time (Sec’s)
Access Group
Report Route
Reporting Options
Lockout Dialler
Report Alarm
Report Alarm Restore
Report Trouble
Report Trouble Restore
Report Bypass
Report Bypass Restore
Delay Report
Zone Options
Lockout Siren
Silent Alarm
Inverted Seal
Bypass Allowed
Sensor Watch
Armed When Part On
Reserved
Test On Exit
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zones 5 to 16
Zones 17 to 64
Zone 1
1 = Delay 1
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 2
5 = Handover
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 3
5 = Handover
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 4
5 = Handover
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 5 - Zone 16
3 = Instant
1
0
120
0
2
Zone 17 - Zone 64
0 = Not Used
1
0
120
0
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Table 16: Zone Defaults
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
7-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
Inputs > Commands >
Inputs > Zone Properties >
--
Smoke Sensor Reset
MENU 3-0-5
This command allows you to reset smoke sensors. When
initiated this command will cause any outputs programmed as
Event Type 49 — Smoke Sensor GND in the chosen area to turn
off for 10 seconds.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [5] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the area that you want to reset the smoke
detectors in then press [OK].
Zone Type
This menu allows you to configure the zone type or behaviour
for every zone in the system. Each zone should be assigned
to a Zone Type that defines the way in which the panel will
respond when an alarm is triggered on that zone. Refer to
the table and descriptions below for the available Zone Type
selections.
Zone Types
0 = Zone Not Used
1 = Burglary Delay 1 (Entry Timer 1)
2 = Burglary Delay 2 (Entry Timer 2)
3 = Burglary Instant 1 (With Exit Delay)
4 = Burglary Instant 2 (No Exit Delay)
5 = Burglary Handover
6 = Burglary 24-Hour
7 = Tamper 24-Hour
8 = Hold Up 24-Hour (Silent & Invisible)
9 = Medical 24-Hour
10 = Panic 24-Hour
11 = Fire 24-Hour
12 = Reserved
13 = Keyswitch Zone
14 = Display Only
15 = 24-Hour Non Burglary
The keypad will automatically return to the menu when all
smoke detectors in the area has been reset.
i
Note
Smoke detectors must have the negative power terminal
connected to an output programmed as Event Type 49 for this
command to work.
Zone Properties
Inputs > Zone Properties >
-
Zone Name
Z
o
n
e
1
N
a
m
MENU 3-1-0
1)
2)
Table 17: Zone Types
e
This menu allows you to program the name for each zone.
Zone names can be up to 16 characters long.
Enter [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
User the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the Zone Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you
can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor
position to the end of the line.
MENU 3-1-1
1
Smoke detector reset in
Progress. Please wait
2)

1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Zone Type
required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Zone Type Zn001
01 - Burglary Delay 1
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Zone Name Zn001
0 – Zone Not Used
Zone 1 Name
Press  OK to SAVE
i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Program the zone type as zero if the zone is not being used.
1 – Burglary Delay 1
Zones programmed as Delay 1 will cause Entry Timer 1 to start when
tripped. The user must disarm the area before entry timer expires
or an alarm will occur. Zones set as Burglary Delay 1 are only active
when the area is armed. See MENU 7-2-1 — Entry Time 1 to set the
required delay time.
2 – Burglary Delay 2
Zones programmed as Delay 2 will cause Entry Timer 2 to start when
tripped. The user must disarm the area before entry timer expires
or an alarm will occur. Zones set as Burglary Delay 2 are only active
when the area is armed. See MENU 7-2-2 — Entry Time 2 to set the
required delay time.
7-4
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
3 – Burglary Instant 1
Zones programmed as Instant 1 will immediatly cause the alarm
to trigger when the zone is tripped. ie No Entry Delay. Zones set as
Burglary Instant 1 have Exit Delay and are only active when the area is
armed. See MENU 7-2-0 — Exit Time
4 – Burglary Instant 2
Zones programmed as Instant 2 will immediatly cause the alarm to
trigger when the zone is triggered. ie. No Entry Delay. Zones set as
Burglary Instant 2 have NO Exit Delay and are only active when the
area is armed.
5 – Burglary Handover
A Handover zone will provide a delayed alarm only when a delay zone
has been tripped first (ie. the entry time is active) otherwise it will
trigger an instant alarm.
Zones programmed as Handover can be set to sequential or nonsequential handover. At factory default, handover is set to sequential
which means that zone must be triggerred in numerical order for the
delay to handover. Non Sequential Handover means the zone do not
have to be programmed in numerical order. In both cases an entry
delay zone must be triggered first for the delay to handover.
See MENU 2-1-2 — Input Options to set Non Sequential Handover.
i
Note
The Zone Types listed above will only trigger an alarm if the
system or area is in the armed state and the exit time has
exprired. Zones must be sealled at the end of exit time to trigger
alarms.
6 – Burglary 24-Hour
Zones programmed as 24-hour burglary will trigger an alarm as soon
as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in.
24-Hour zones are active 24 hours a day. A 24hr Burglary report will
be sent to the central station receiver.
7 – Tamper 24-Hour
Zones programmed as 24-Hour Tamper will trigger an alarm as soon
as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in.
24-Hour zones are active 24 hours a day. A 24hr Tamper report will be
sent to the central station receiver.
If a horn speaker is connected and programmed, a distinct fire sound
will be heard to indicate that it is a fire alarm that has registered. The
fire sound via the horn speaker is different than the burglary sound.
13 – Keyswitch
A keyswitch zone can be used as an input terminal to turn on and/or
off an area. Refer to MENU 3-4-1 — Keyswitch Options to select the
various options such as latching or momentary arm and/or disarm etc.
When reporting back to base, the keyswitch user number will follow
the actual zone number.
14 – Display Only
A display zone is not a burglary zone. It can never sound the sirens or
trigger the dialler. Its purpose is to only display on the keypad when
faulted.
15 – 24-Hour Non Burglary
This zone type operates as a 24-hour type and is used for non-specific
alarms such as water level or temperature sensors.
i
Note
The 24 Hour Zone Types listed above are active 24hrs a day.
They will trigger an alarm regardless of whether or not the
system or area is in the Armed, Part Armed or Disarmed state.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Area Assignment
9 – Medical 24-Hour
This zone type is used for personal medical emergency alarms. Zones
programmed as 24-Medical will trigger an alarm as soon as the zone
becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. A 24hr Medical
report will be sent to the central station receiver.
10 – Panic 24-Hour
This zone type is used for a general type of emergency including the
presence of one or more unwanted persons trying to gain entry to
the premises. It will sound an alarm at any time as soon as the zone
becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. A 24hr Panic
report will be sent to the central station receiver.
11 – Fire 24-Hour
This zone type is used for Fire and Smoke detector alarms. Zones
programmed as 24hr Fire will trigger an alarm as soon as the zone
becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. A 24hr Fire
report will be sent to the central station receiver.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
MENU 3-1-2
1
This menu programs which area or partition each zone belongs
to. The system can be partitioned to a maximum of 8 separate
areas. Each zone can only be assigned to a single area. For
installations requiring a common access point, it is possible
to set Area 1 to be a common area. See MENU 7-7-1 — Area
Options
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [2] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
Area Assignment Zn001
8 – Hold Up 24-Hour
Zones programmed as 24-Hour Hold Up will trigger a Silent alarm as
soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area
is in. 24-Hour zones are active 24 hours a day. A 24hr Hold Up report
will be sent to the central station receiver. No Siren/Strobe or Keypad
indication will be given.

01 - Area 1
Press  0-9 OK or MENU
2)
Use the up and down arrows to select the area that you want to
assign the zone to.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Pulse Count

MENU 3-1-3
0
0
PULSES
Pulse Count sets the number of trigger pulses a single zone
must receive before an alarm will be tripped. The number of
pulses must be detected within the Pulse Count Time period
for an alarm to occur. See MENU 3-1-4 — Pulse Count Time
A feature called Pulse Count Handover can be enabled
allowing pulses registered by one zone to handover to
another zone provided they are the same Zone Type (ie. instant
zone to instant zone) and in the same Area. See MENU 2-1-2
7-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
— Input Options
A reader can belong to only 1 Access Group.
When pulse count hands over from one zone to another and
an alarm is triggered, a cross alarm report will be sent to the
central station.
Access Group
There are 8 different access groups.
1)
Door Access Group Example
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [3]and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The
keypad will display the current pulse count time for the chosen
zone.
1)
To set up a door access group you need to select an unused
Access Group number from 1 to 8, in this example we will
assume the Access Group number to be 5.
2)
Under user properties assign the users who you wish to have
access to Access Group 5. Remember that you are able to
assign users to more than one Access Group.
3)
Now select the output that will be used to operate the door
strike and assign it to Access Group 5. You also need to set the
output type to ACCESS and the polarity to one shot low with a
time of how long you would like the strike to operate.
Generally a strike would be operated for 5 seconds.
4)
Assign the Reader under Reader properties to Access Group 5.
Pulse Count Zn001
00
Press  0-9 OK or MENU
3)
Using the numeric keys, enter the number of pulses required.
Valid entries are 0 – 15 pulses.
4)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
When a user who belongs to Access Group 5 presents their
token to the reader that is assigned to Access Group 5, the
assigned output will operate releasing the door strike.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Pulse Count Time

MENU 3-1-4
1
2
0
SECONDS
This menu sets the time period during which the number of
zone trigger pulses must be received for an alarm to occur. The
zone must be set as a Pulse Count Zone for this time to have
any effect.
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [4] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The
keypad will display the current pulse count time.
Pulse Count Time Zn001
120 Seconds
Press  0-9 OK or MENU
A reader can belong not only to a Access Group but also to an
Area if arming and disarming is required from the reader.
If a user presents their token to an reader that has an area
assigned, then the user Access Group and Area Permissions
are both checked. If the area is armed and the user belongs to
the same area as the Reader and the same Access Group, the
system will disarm and allow access.
If the user does not belong to the same area as the reader
but the Access Groups match, then door access will only be
available to that user if the area is disarmed.
When using the same reader for door access as well as arming,
you need to select the badging option MENU 1-6-3 — Reader
Options. Badging requires that you present your token 3 times
in succession within 5 seconds to arm the system.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Access Group
3)
Using the numeric keys, enter the required Pulse Count Time.
Valid entries are 0 – 255 seconds.
4)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.

MENU 3-1-5
0
1)
Understanding Access Groups
Access Groups are used to link Readers, Users and Outputs
together to allow you to operate a door strike when a user
token is presented to a given reader. To do this you need to
create an access group and assign the user, the reader and the
output to the same access group.
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [5] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The
keypad will display the current Access Group setting.
Access Group Zn001
00 - No Access Group
Press 0-9 OK or MENU
Users
A user can belong to multiple Access Groups.
2)
Use the up and down arrows to select the Access Group that
you want to assign the zone to.
Outputs
An output can only belong to 1 Access Group.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Reader
7-6
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
3)
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Report Route

MENU 3-1-6
0 = Report Events To Log Only
1
1 = Report Events To Destination 1 + Log
Lockout Dialler
2 = Report Events To Destination 2 + Log
Setting this option will enable Dialler Lockout functionality for
the respective zone(s). All zones in the system can be individually
programmed for Dialler Lockout.
3 = Report Events To Destination 1 & Destination 2 + Log
4 = Report Events To Destination 2 If Destination 1 Fails +Log
This menu sets the Zone Report Route or Report Destination
for each individual zone in the system. All events such as
alarms and troubles for each zone will be reported according
to this menu setting. Each zone can only be assigned to one
report route from the list above.
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [6] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The
keypad will display the current Zone Report Route.
1)
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK or MENU
See MENU 5-4-5 — Swinger Dialler to set the number of times a zone
is allowed to trigger before being locked out.
Report Alarm
Report Trouble
2)
Use the up and down arrows to select the Report Route that
you want to assign the zone to.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Note
When enabled the zone will be allowed to transmit alarm reports
each time it is triggered provided that the Swinger Dialler count has
not been reached. If the zone is triggered and the Swinger Dialler
count has been reached then the zone will become locked out and no
further reports will be sent for that zone. Dialler lockout will be reset
on the next arming cycle.
Setting this option will enable the system to Report Alarm events
for the respective zone. All zones in the system can be individually
programmed to report alarms.
Report Route Zn001
i
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Setting this option will enable the system to Report Trouble events
for the respective zone. A Trouble report will be sent if the zone is
left unsealled at the end of exit time. All zones in the system can be
individually programmed to report trouble events.
Report Bypass
Setting this option will enable the system to Report Zone Bypass
events for the respective zone. A Bypass report will be sent at the end
of exit time for zones which have been manually bypassed. All zones
in the system can be individually programmed to report Zone Bypass
events.
At factory default all Zones are set to report to Destination
1 and the System Log. See the Zone Default Table for more
information on Zone default settings.
Report Restores
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Report Options

MENU 3-1-7
1
Lockout Dialer
Y
2
Report Alarm
Y
3
Report Trouble
Y
4
Report Bypass
Y
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Report Restores
Y
8
Delay Report
N
The above options are programmable per zone.
1)
2)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [7] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The
keypad will display the Report Options for the currently
selected zone.
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
Setting this option allows the system to send Restore reports for
zones that have already sent a previous alarm or trouble report on the
same arming cycle.
1)
Burglary Zone alarms and troubles restore when the zone
reseals or the area is disarmed.
2)
24hr Zone alarms and troubles restore when the zone reseals.
3)
Bypassed Zone restore when the area is disarmed.
Delay Report
Setting this option will cause the system to delay alarm reports for
the selected zone. This option can be enabled to allow a user to enter
their PIN and disable the report in case they have caused a false alarm.
If a PIN is not entered within the delay time, the system will trigger the
sirens and send the report as normal.
See MENU 5-4-6 — Burg Report Delay and MENU 5-4-7 — Fire Report
Delay to set the delay time.
If a PIN code is entered after the delay time has expired, and the sirens
are still sounding, the system will send the Alarm report followed by a
Cancel report.
 Lockout Dialler
 Report Alarm
 Report Troubles
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
7-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
Sensor Watch
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Zone Options

MENU 3-1-8
1
Lockout Siren
Y
2
Silent Alarm
N
3
Inverted Seal
N
4
Bypass Allowed
Y
5
Sensor Watch
N
6
Armed When in Part Mode 1
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Test On Exit
Y
The above options are programmable per zone.
1)
2)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [8] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively,
you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The
keypad will display the Report Options for the currently
selected zone.
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
 Lockout Siren
Silent Alarm
Inverted Seal
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
Setting this option causes the system to monitor the zone’s activity
while the corresponding area is in the disarmed state. If the zone
fails to unseal and reseal at least once during the Sensor Watch
Time period a system trouble will be displayed on the keypad and a
Sensor Watch report for the corresponding zone will be sent to the
programmed destination. See MENU 3-9-2 — Sensor Watch to set the
time period.
i
Note
Sensor Watch monitoring is only active when the area is in the
disarmed state. 24 hour zone types cannot be monitored using
the Sensor Watch feature.
Armed When In Part Mode 1
Setting this option causes the zone to be active or monitored when
the corresponding area is armed in Part On Mode 1.
If this option is not set, the corresponding zone will be inactive when
the area is armed in Part Mode 1 allowing users to move freely within
this zone and not trigger an alarm.
Test On Exit
Setting this option will cause the system to prompt the user that a
zone or zones are not sealled when they attempt to arm the area in
which the zone belongs. An error beep will sound and a zone trouble
message will display on the keypad advising the user to seal the
zone(s) or to bypass them before the area will arm.
If this option is disabled the zone will not be tested during the arming
sequence and the system will arm. If the zone(s) are unsealled at the
end of exit time a Zone Trouble report will be sent.
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Lockout Siren
Setting this option will enable Siren Lockout functionality for the
respective zone(s). All zones in the system can be individually
programmed for Siren Lockout.
When enabled the respective zone will be allowed to cause the
sirens to sound each time a new alarm is triggered provided that the
Swinger Siren count has not been reached. If the zone is triggered and
the Swinger Siren count has been reached then the siren will become
locked out for that zone and no further siren activations will occur
from that zone. Only zones which have been locked out are prevented
frrom triggering the sirens.
Siren lockout will be reset on the next arming cycle.
See MENU 7-4-3 — Swinger Siren to set the shutdown count.
Silent Alarm
Setting this option will set the correspondiing zone to become a silent
zone. Audible alarm outputs will not sound when a silent zone is
triggered.
Inverted Seal
Setting this option allows a normally-open sensor or device to operate
as a normally-closed device by reversing the open/closed state of the
zone loop. (eg. When the zone loop is open, the system will register
the zone loop as closed or normal.)
Bypass Allowed
Setting this option allows users with the appropriate access level to
manually bypass this zone effectively removing it from the area for
the current arming cycle. All zone types including 24hour zones can
be bypassed if this option is selected. Bypassed zones will be reset
when the area is turned off or disarmed.
7-8
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
2)
Adding RF Sensors
The Solution 64 panel supports a wide range of 3rd party
wireless movement sensors, door contacts and smoke
detectors allowing you to choose the most appropriate devices
for each installation.
Press [OK] to DELETE the RF device and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without deleting.
RF Sensor - Learn Mode
1)
There are basically two different methods for adding RF
devices to the Solution 64, Direct Entry and Learn Mode. The
system will prompt for the appropriate method depending on
the Receiver type you have fitted.
Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the zone you want to program in the list and
press[OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number
directly and press [OK].
The system will only list zone that dont already have and RF
device programmed.
Enter Zone RFid for
Zn001 Zone 1 Name
000000000
Press OK or MENU
In all cases the RF sensor must be compatible with the RF
Receiver that is installed. See MENU 3-5-0 — Input Type.
i
Zones configured as RF zone will follow all other zone
properties.
Note
RF Sensor - Direct Entry Mode
Inputs > RF Zone >
Add RF Device

Trigger the RF sensor so that transmits a valid signal.
3)
Once the device code has been leartn the system will
automatically exit and return to the menu.
MENU 3-3-0
This menu allows you to program an RF device to a zone. Only
one device can be connected to each zone up to a maximum
of 64 RF devices per system.
1)
2)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the zone you want to program in the list and
press[OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number
directly and press [OK]. The system will only list zones that
dont already have an RF device programmed.
Enter Zone RFid for
Z001 Zone 1 Name
000000000
Press OK or MENU
i
Note
Using the numeric keys, enter the RF device ID number.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Test RF Device

1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the zone in the list and press[OK]. The keypad will
only list zones that have an ID programmed. If no zones have
an ID number programmed, the keypad will display:
No Matching List Items
Found!
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
OK to delete RF zone for
Zn001 Zone 1 Name
007407097
Press OK or MENU
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
MENU 3-3-2
Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [2] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the zone you want to test in the list and press[OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and
press [OK]. The system will only list RF zones in the current
area.
Zn002 Zone 2 Name
Waiting For Trigger
Press OK or MENU
MENU 3-3-1
This menu allows you to delete an RF device .

This menu allows you to test just how good the current
position is for an RF device. Enter the command and you will
be presented with a list of RF zones in the current area that are
available for test. Use the arrow keys to highlight the zone to
test and press OK. At any time press menu to exit.
Inputs > RF Zone >
Delete RF Device
in learn mode. Devices that have already been learnt cannot be
learnt again unless they are deleted from the system first.
Inputs > RF Zone >
1)
2)
Make sure that only one device is triggerred when the system is
2)
Once a signal is received the following information will be
displayed.
Zn002 Zone 2 Name
Transmission = 001
Signal = Good
Press OK or MENU
Signal can = Good, Average or Relocate
Every time you send a transmission, the number of
transmissions will increment and the average of the signals
with be displayed. Be sure to send a few transmission to
establish a more accurate signal measurement.
7-9
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
Use the up and down arrows to select the required keyswitch
option then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2)
Global Input Options
Inputs > Global Input Options >
EOL Value

MENU 3-4-0
0 = No EOL
5
Inputs > Global Input Options >
Input Options

MENU 3-4-2
1 = 1K0
6 = 4K7
11 = 12K
2 = 1K5
7 = 5K6
12 = 15K
1
Tamper On Short
N
Reserved
N
3 = 2K2
8 = 6K8
13 = 22K
2
4 = 2K7
9 = 8K1
14 = 3K3 with Tamper (6K8)
3
Response Time 500ms
N
5 = 3K3
10 = 10K
15 = Split EOL (Parallel)
4
Reserved
N
(3K3 = Primary, 6K8 = Secondary)
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This menu programs the End Of Line resistor (EOL) value that
is global for all hard-wired zones including zones on the Zone
Expander Module. Only one EOL Value can be programmed.
Setting the EOL Value to type 0 to 14 will configure the system
as 8 hardwired zones and 16 on the expander board if one is
fitted. Setting the option to type 15 will configure the main
panel as 16 HW zones and the optional expander board as 32
HW zones.
This menu programs the various global input options which will effect
all zones on the system.
Tamper On Short
Setting this option will cause any Zone which become shorted to
report a tamper alarm condition for the zone.
Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current EOL value (Default = 5).
1)
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Response Time 500ms
EOL Value
Setting this option will increase the response time for all zones to
500ms.
05 - 3k3 Ohm
Press  0-9 OK to Save
Inputs > PGM Input >
Use the up and down arrows to select the EOL Value you want
to use then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2)
Input Type

0 = Disabled
MENU 3-4-1
0 = Latching - All On/Off
5 = Momentary All On/Off
1 = Latching - All On
6 = Momentary - All On
2 = Latching Part On/Off
7 = Momentary - Part On/Off
3 = Latching - Part On
8 = Momentary - Part On
4 = Latching Off
9 = Momentary - Off
0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu programs the properties for any zone in the system
programmed as a keyswitch zone. Only one option can be
selected for the entire system which means that all keyswitches
fitted will behave the same way.
1 = Latching - On/Off (RF Relay)
5 = Crow Serial RF Receiver
2 = Momentary - On/Off (RF Relay)
6 = Ness Serial RF Receiver
3 = Bosch RF On/Off
7 = Inovonics Serial RF RX
4 = DS Serial RF Receiver
8 = Secure Wireless RF RX
This menu option is used to configure the systems
programmable input terminal. Various devices can be
connected including keyswitches of radio controlled relays
etc. When RF zones are required you need to connect the RF
receiver to this input
Connect keyswitch between Input terminal and GND. See
Wiring Diagrams in Section 3 for various connection diagrams.
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current input type (Default = 0 Disabled).
Input Type P001
The system can send Open and Close reports based on the
keyswitch operation with the zone number representing the
user number in the report.
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current keyswitch options (Default = 0 Disabled).
Keyswitch Options
00 - Latching All On/Off
Press  0-9 OK to Save
MENU 3-5-0
0
Inputs > Global Input Options >
Keyswitch Options

00 - Disabled
Press  0-9 OK to Save
2)
Use the up and down arrows to select the required Input
Device Type then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
i
The Latching and Momentary On/Off modes are active low, and
when triggered, they will automatically force arm the area.
Note
7-10
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
Input Testing
Inputs > Tamper Inputs >
Tamper Options

MENU 3-6-0
1
Display Panel Tamper
Y
2
Report Panel Tamper
Y
3
Audible Panel Tamper
Y
4
Display Expander Tamper
N
5
Report Expander Tamper
N
6
Audible Expander Tamper
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
This menu programs how the various system tamper inputs behave
when faulted. These dedicated tamper inputs are active 24 hours a
day when enabled.
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [6] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current tamper options.
Inputs > Input Testing >
Walk Test All Zones
3)
Once the mode is activated all zones in the area will be listed
one after the other on the keypad display. As each zone is
successfully tested it will be removed from the list leaving only
those zone still to be tested in the list.
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [0] and select the area to walk test
from the list then press [OK].
2)
The keypad will begin scrolling all of the zones that are to be
tested as per the below display.
To test Zn001 open/close
Zone 1
Press OK or MENU
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
To test Zn002 open/close
Zone 2
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Display Enclosure Tamper
Press OK or MENU
3)
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a trouble condition
when the tamper circuit that monitors the systems enclosure is
faulted. The trouble condition will clear when the tamper circuit has
restored.
Open and close each zone in the list. Zones that have been
successfully tested are removed from the keypad scroll list.
When all zones have been tested, the keypad will display:
Selected zones have been
tested OK
Report Enclosure Tamper
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Enclosure Tamper report
when the enclosure tamper circuit is faulted. A Enclosure Tamper
Restore report will be sent when the tamper circuit has restored.
MENU 3-9-0
This menu allows you to test all zones within an area at the
same time. To perform a successfull walk test, each zone in the
area must be sealled and unsealled. Users must have access to
the area they want to test.
 Display Box Tamper
 Report Box Tamper
 Audible Box Tamper
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
--
Press OK or MENU
4)
Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Audible Enclosure Tamper
Setting this option will cause the panel to sound the sirens when the
enclosure tamper circuit is faulted.
Inputs > Input Testing >
Walk Test A Zone
--
MENU 3-9-1
Display Expander Tamper
Setting this option causes the system to display tamper events which
have occured on peripheral modules.
Report Expander Tamper
Setting this option enables peripheral tamper reporting.
Audible Expander Tamper
This menu allows you to select a single zone to be walk tested.
To perform a successfull walk test, the sellected zone must be
sealled and unsealled. Users must have access to the zone they
want to test.
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the zone you want to walk test in the list and
press[OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number
directly and press [OK].
2)
The keypad will display the zone to be tested.
Setting this option causes the system to trigger an audible alarm
when a peripheral tamper is triggered.
To test open/close
Zone 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
7-11
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Input Programming
3)
Open and close the zone that needs to be tested. When the test
has been completed the keypad will display:
Zn001 Zone 1 Name
Test Successful
Press OK or MENU
4)
Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Inputs > Input Testing >
Sensor Watch Time

MENU 3-9-2
0
3
0
DAYS
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu programs the Sensor Watch Time interval. Zones
programmed for Sensor Watch are required to seal and unseal
at least once within the Sensor Watch Time period or a trouble
message will be displayed on the keypad and a Zone Trouble
report sent.
Valid entries are 1 -255 Days and 0 = Sensor Watch Disabled
1)
Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current sensor watch time (Default = 30 days).
SensorWatch Time
030 Days
Press 0-9 OK or MENU
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the new Sensor Watch time in
days then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
Sensor Watch monitoring is only active when the area is in the
disarmed state. 24 hour zone types cannot be monitored using
the Sensor Watch feature.
» » E N D
7-12
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 8
Output Programming
The Solution 64 is capable of controlling up to 16 outputs. The
first 4 outputs are on the main control board and an additional
4 outputs are provided using an output expander module.
Each output can have its own unique name up to 16 characters
to identify it on the system for display and reporting purposes.
Under the commands menu you are able to view the status
of any input and to change its on/off condition. In the case of
latching output types, you will be required to reset the output
manually using these commands.
Outputs are programmed using an event table. First select the
event type that will cause the output to trigger. Then select
the polarity of the event, if it is low and goes high or high and
goes low. If the event is pulsing or one shot type, the time
parameter must also be programmed to define the time of the
pulse.
Event Assignment, this is extremely important parameter
and has a different meaning depending on the event type
selected. For example, event type “24 Area Part On” the event
assignment selects the Area that is armed in part on for the
output to trigger. If you set the event assignment to 1, then it
will correspond to area 1 and so on, setting it to zero means
all areas. See the event type table for more detail on the
relationship of event type to event assignment.
Outputs 1 and 2 are special outputs that can be configured
as horn speaker polarity types and are monitored to report
a device connection trouble. Output 4 is a dry relay contact
which has a optional jumper that allows you to switch positive
or negative without the need to add additional wiring.
Output 1 Name Op001
Is Off and Ready
Press OK or MENU
3)
The keypad will display the following when the output is
currently in the OFF state but the connection is missing.
Output 1 Name Op001
Is Off
Connection Trouble
Press OK or MENU
4)
The keypad will display the following when the output is
currently in the ON state and ready.
Output 1 Name Op001
Is On and Ready
Press OK or MENU
5)
The keypad will display the following when the output is
currently in the ON state but the connection is missing.
Output 1 Name Op001
Is On and Ready
Connection Trouble
Press OK or MENU
The outputs are all protected and will shut down individually
under overload conditions. A report will be generated and a
displayed on the keypad to indicate the trouble condition.
6)
Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Output Commands
Outputs > Commands >
Outputs > Commands >
Output Status
---
MENU 4-0-0
This command allows you to view the current status of any
system output.
1)
2)
Press [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [0] and select the output you want to
view from the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can
directly enter the output number that you want to view then
press [OK].
The keypad will display the following when the output is
currently in the OFF state and ready to activate.
Bosch Secu-
Turn Output On/Off
--
MENU 4-0-1
This command allows you to manuallly turn any output ON or
OFF. Outputs can be configured to control various functions
including outside lighting, pool pumps, watering systems, air
conditioners etc.
1)
Press [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [1] and select the output you want to
operate from the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can
directly enter the output number then press [OK].
2)
The keypad will display the following when the output is off. To
turn the Output On, press [ON].
8-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
Output 1 Name Op001
Output Is Off
To Turn ON, Press ON
To Go Back Press OK
3)
Event Type Op001
36 - External Audible
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
The keypad will display the following when the output is on. To
turn the output Off, press [OFF].
Output 1 Name Op001
Output Is ON
To Turn OFF, Press OFF
To Go Back Press OK
4)
Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
2 – AC Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects that the AC mains power has been missing for 1 minute and
will reset when the power has been restored for 1 minute.
Outputs > Properties >
-
Output Name
u
t
p
u
t
1
N
a
m
MENU 4-1-0
3 – Telephone Line Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects that the telco line has been disconnected for 30 seconds and
will reset when the line has been restored.
e
This menu allows you to program the name for each output.
Output names can be up to 16 characters long.
4 – Comm Fail – Destination 1 / 2
1)
Enter [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Output in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the output number directly and
press [OK].
2)
Use the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the Output Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time
you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current
cursor position to the end of the line.
i
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects a low or missing stand-by battery and will reset once a
successful battery test has been performed.
Battery tests are performed automatically every 4 hours and when
the system is armed. A manual test can also be requested at any time
while the system is disarmed. See MENU 7-9-1 — Battery Test
Output Properties
O
1 - Battery Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate if the panel fails to
report a signal to report destination1 or 2 or both. The panel will try
to send the report as many times as set in the call attempt counter
before registering a comm fail.
The output will restore as soon as a successful report has been
sent to the destination that has previously failed to report. If both
Destination 1 and Destination 2 had failed to report then successful
report to both destinations will need to be made before the output
will reset. See MENU 5-2-0 — Call Attempt Count
Output Name Op001
5 – Third Failed Dialler Attempt
Output 1
Press  OK to SAVE
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel has
made 3 unsuccessful call attempts to the base station. The output
will reset when all pending messages have been sent or when the
maximum number of call attempts have been made.
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 — Programming
6 – Destination 1 Reporting
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel is
communicating to Destination 1 and will reset when the transmission
ends.
Note
7 – Destination 2 Reporting
Outputs > Properties >
Event Type

MENU 4-1-1
0
0
0
This menu allows you to set the output even type. See the
Output Event Type Table and Event Type Descriptions in this
section for more information on the available options.
1)
2)
8-2
Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Output in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output number and
press [OK].
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Event Type
required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving. It is also possible to directly enter the
Event Type number then Press [OK].
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel is
communicating to Destination 2 and will reset when the transmission
ends.
8 – Destination 1/2 Kiss-Off
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
receives an kiss-off acknowledgment from the receiving party while
communication to destination 1 or 2. It is recommended that this
output is programmed with a one-shot timer.
9 – Destination 1 Kiss-Off
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
receives a kiss-off acknowledgment from the receiving party while
communicating to destination 1. It is recommended that this output
is programmed with a one-shot timer.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
10 – Destination 2 Kiss-Off
21 – Area Disarmed
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
receives a kiss-off acknowledgment from the receiving party while
communicating to destination 2. It is recommended that this output
is programmed with a one-shot timer.
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as the
corresponding area is disarmed and will reset when the area is armed
in either the All On or Part On modes.
11 – Dialler Disabled
This event type will cause the output to operate if the panel reporting
functions are manually disabled and will reset when reporting is
enabled. See MENU 5-2-1 — Dialer Options.
12 – Horn Speaker Missing
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects that a horn speaker is missing. The output will reset when
the horn speaker is reconnected. Only output 1 and 2 can be
programmed as a horn speaker outputs. See MENU 4-1-3 — Output
Polarity for information on configuring an output to drive a horn
speaker
13 – Output Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects that an output device is missing or in an overload condition.
The output will reset when all failed outputs have restored or the
overload condition has been removed.
If the output event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas),
then all areas must be disarmed for the output to operate. The output
will reset as soon as any area is armed in either the All On or Part On
modes.
22 – Area Armed (Any)
This event type will cause the output to operate when the selected
area is armed in either All On or Part On mode. The output will reset
when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas)
then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed
in All On or Part On mode. The output will reset as soon any area is
disarmed.
23 – Area All On
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as a specific
area is armed All On mode and will reset when the area is disarmed.
14 – Panel On-Line
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas),
then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed in
the All On mode and will reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
seizes the phone line and will reset when the phone line is released.
24 – Area Part On
15 – Incoming Call
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects an incoming call on the phone line and will reset when the
ring signal stops.
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as a specific
area is armed Part On mode and will reset when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas),
then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed in
the Part On mode and will reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
16 – System Trouble
25 – Area Part 2 On
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects a system trouble condition and will reset when the condition
is cleared.
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as a
specific area is armed Part 2 On mode and will reset when the ares is
disarmed.
17 – Box Tamper
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas),
then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed in
the Part 2 On mode and will reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects that the onboard enclosure tamper circuit is open. The output
will reset when the tamper circuit is closed. No EOL resistor is required
on this input.
18 – Zone Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel
detects that a zone has a trouble condition and will reset when the
trouble condition has cleared.
19 – Zone Mirror
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific zone
is open or unsealled and will reset when the zone closes.
See MENU 4-1-2 — Event Assignment for infomation on how to set
the zone to mirror.
20 – Zone Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific zone
has triggered an alarm and will reset when the corresponding area is
disarmed. For a non 24hour zone to trigger an alarm the area must be
armed. See MENU 4-1-2 — Event Assignment for infomation on how
to set the zone to monitor.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
26 – Entry Time
This event type will cause the output to operate while either Entry
Timer 1, Entry Timer 2 or the Part Mode Entry Timer is active. The
output will reset when the entry timer expires or the corresponding
area is disarmed.
27 – Exit Time
This event type will cause the output to operate while Exit Timer
is active. The output will reset when the exit timer expires or the
corresponding area is disarmed.
28 – End Of Exit Time
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Exit Time
expires and will reset when the corresponding area is disarmed.
29 – Chime On
This event type will cause the output to operate when Chime Mode is
activated and will reset when Chime Mode is turned off.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then
the output will operate as soon as Chime Mode is activated in any
area and will reset when Chime Mode is turned off in all areas.
8-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
30 - Chime Zone Faulted
37 – Internal Siren
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific
Chime Zone is triggered and reset when the Chime Zone reseals.
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible
alarm occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is
disarmed. No speaker beeps are generated for this event type.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then
the output will operate as soon as any chime zone is triggered
provided that Chime Mode is on in those areas. The output will reset
when all Chime Zones are resealed. For this event type to work Chime
Mode must be turned on. See MENU 2-0-5 — Chime On/Off
31 – Auto Arm Pre-Alert
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Auto Arm
Pre-Alert Timer is active and reset when the Pre-Alert Timer expires or
a valid user code is entered.
32 – Ready To Arm All On
This event type will cause the output to operate when the area is
disarmed and all zones in the area are sealled. The output will reset
when the area is armed or when a zone becomes unsealled.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then
the output will only operate if all areas are disarmed and all zones
are sealled. The output will reset if any area is armed or if any zone
becomes unsealled.
33 – Ready To Arm Part On
This event type will cause the output to operate when the area is
disarmed and all zones in the area which are to be monitored in Part
On mode are sealled. The output will reset when the area is armed or
when a Part On zone becomes unsealled.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then
the output will only operate if all areas are disarmed and all Part On
zones are sealled. The output will reset if any area is armed or if any
Part On zone becomes unsealled.
34 – Ready To Arm Part 2 On
This event type will cause the output to operate when the area is
disarmed and all zones in the area which are to be monitored in Part 2
On mode are sealled. The output will reset when the area is armed or
when a Part 2 On zone becomes unsealled.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then
the output will only operate if all areas are disarmed and all Part 2 On
zones are sealled. The output will reset if any area is armed or if any
Part 2 On zone becomes unsealled.
35 – ‘Close’ Report Sent OK
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Closing
report has been acknowledged (Kissed-Off ) by the control room
receiver. The output will reset when the area is disarmed. If the
output has been assigned to multiple areas then it will only reset
when all areas have been disarmed.
36 – External Siren (Spk Beeps)
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible
alarm occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is
disarmed.
This event type will also generate speaker beeps when the system or
area is armed via a RF Keyfob, the Programmable Input Terminal or
Keyswitch zone.
 1 beep when the area is disarmed
 2 beeps when the area is armed All On
38 – Alarm Any (Silent or Audible)
This event type will cause the output to operate when any silent or
audible alarm occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is
disarmed
39 – Fire Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible fire
zone or keypad emergency fire alarm occurs. The output will reset
when the system or area is disarmed.
40 – Burglary Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible
burglary alarm (including keypad emergency panic, medical and
tamper alarm) occurs. The output will reset when the system or area
is disarmed.
41 – Silent Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when any silent alarm
occurs (including silent fire and silent keypad emergency alarms). The
output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
42 – Duress Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when a user initiates
a Duress alarm.
43 – Keypad Medical
This event type will cause the output to operate when a silent or
audible medical alarm has been initiated from the keypad. The
output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
To initiate a medical emergency via the keypad, simultaneously press
and hold the [7] and [9] keys for 2 seconds.
44 – Keypad Fire
This event type will cause the output to operate when a silent or
audible fire alarm has been initiated from the keypad. The output will
reset when the system or area is disarmed.
To initiate a fire emergency via the keypad, simultaneously press and
and hold the [4] and [6] keys for 2 seconds.
45 – Keypad Panic
This event type will cause the output to operate when a silent or
audible panic alarm has been initiated from the keypad. The output
will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
To initiate a panic emergency via the keypad, simultaneously press
and hold [1] and [3] keys.
46 – Keypad Tamper
This event type will cause the output to operate when the tamper
circuit on the rear of the keypad is triggered. The output will reset
when a valid user PIN is entered.
47 – Access Denied
This event type will trigger if you attempt to enter an incorrect code
more times than programmed in the pin retry count location. The
event assignment will be the area number for this event type.
 3 beeps when the area is armed Part On
8-4
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
48 – Strobe
57 – Part Entry Time
This event type is used to operate a stobe warning light. The output
can be made to operate when any of the following events occur.
At leaset one strobe event must be selected for this output type to
operate. See MENU 2-1-5 — Strobe Trigger option.
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Part Entry
timer is active and will reset when Part Entry time expires.
Strobe trigger options include:
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific
schedule occurs. The output requires a schedule to be programmed
to operate an output. The output programmed to follow the schedule
must match that programmed in the schedule index.
 = Audible Burglary Alarm
 = Silent Burglary Alarm
58 – Schedule
 = Fire Alarm
59 – Keypad Temperature Alarm
 = Arm/Disarm Flash Via RF Keyfob
This event type will cause the output to operate when the keypad
temperature increases above the maximum or falls below the
minimum set temperature. The output will reset when the
temperature reads between the maximum and minimum values.
See MENU 7-7-3 — Keypad Hi/Lo Temp in Section 11 - System
Programming
 = Arm/Disarm Flash Via Keyswitch or PGM Input
 = 24-Hour Alarm
49 – Smoke Sensor GND
This output is used to allow smoke detectors to be automatically reset
when the system is disarmed. You should connect the GND terminal
of all smoke detectors in the system to outputs which are set to this
event type.
For this output type to perform correctly you should program the
output polarity as type 11 - Normally Low One Shot Open and
program the output time parameter to be 5 seconds. The smoke
sensor needs to be connected to a zone input programmed as fire.
If fire alarm verification is required, we recommend that you program
the zone pulse count tor 2 pulses and the pulse count time to 90
seconds for each fire zone.
50 – Sensor Watch
This event type will cause the output to operate when a zone sensor
watch fault has occured. The output will reset when the system or
area in armed. See MENU 3-1-8 — Zone Options in Section 7 - Input
Programming for more information on Sensor Watch.
51 – Senior Watch
This event type will cause the output to operate when a Senior Watch
fault has occured. See MENU 2-1-2 — Input Options in Section 6 - Area
Programming for more information on Senior Watch.
60 – Access Group
This event type will cause the output to operate when a user assigned
to the same Access Group swipes their token. The prox reader must
be assigned to the same Access Group as the Output and User.
The Event Assignment is the Access Group Number.
Outputs > Properties >
Event Assignment
0
Refer to Output Event Type Table for a complete listing of
available options.
1)
Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [2] and select the output you want to
operate from the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can
directly enter the output number then press [OK]. The keypad
will display the current Event Assignment.
Event Assignment Op001
001
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
53 – RF Keyfob Function 1
This event type will cause the output to operate when Key Y is pressed
on the Keyfob. This function requires a 4 button keyfob.
0
This menu allows you to assign an Output event to an Area
number (1 to 8), a User number (1 to 48), a Zone number (1
to 64) or a Group number (1 to 8) that the output will follow.
Programming a zero will assign the output event to follow any
area, user, zone or access group depending on the event type.
This event type will cause the output to operate when a Entry/
Exit Delay zone becomes unsealled during exit time and remains
unsealled when the exit time expires. The output will reset when the
system is disarmed.
54 – RF Keyfob Function 2
MENU 4-1-2
0
52 – Exit Error
This event type will cause the output to operate when Key X is
pressed on the Keyfob. This function requires a 4 button keyfob.

3)
Using the numeric keys, enter the Output Event Assignment
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
55 – Output Pre Alert
This event type will cause the output to operate when the output prealert timer is active and will reset when the pre-alert timer expires.
56 – Follow PIN
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specified
user PIN is entered via the keypad or when the corresponding user’s
keyfob or token is used.
You should program the User whose PIN is to be followed into the
Event Assignment for this output.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
8-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
Normally Open Pulsing Low
Outputs > Properties >
Output Polarity

MENU 4-1-3
0
0
The output polarity programs how the output will operate.
Only one option (0 – 15) can be programmed per output. See
the Output Polarity description for more detailled information.
Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [3] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the output in the list and press [OK]. The keypad
will display the current output polarity.
1)
Output Polarity Op001
14 - Speaker Output
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Output Polarity
required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
2)
Option
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Polarity
Normally Open Going Low
Normally Open Going Low With Pre Delay
Normally Open Latching Low
Normally Open Pulsing Low
Normally Open One Shot Low
Normally Open One Shot Low + Retrigger
Normally Open One Shot Low + Reset
Normally Low Going Open
Normally Low Going Open With Pre Delay
Normally Low Latching Open
Normally Low Pulsing Open
Normally Low One Shot Open
Normally Low One Shot Open + Retrigger
Normally Low One Shot Open + Reset
Horn Speaker (Output 1 or 2 Only)
Reserved
Table 18: Output Polarity Types
Normally Open Going Low
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event
occurs. The output will reset when the output event restores. Time
parameters do not apply to this polarity type.
Normally Open Going Low With Pre Delay
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event
occurs provided the time parameter has expired. The output will reset
when the output event restores. Time parameters will only set the Pre
Delay when this polarity is selected.
Normally Open Latching Low
Output is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when
the event occurs. The output can only be reset manually using the
Output Command Menu.
8-6
Output is normally open circuit and will pulse LOW when the event
occurs. The output will reset when the output event restores. Use the
Time Parameter to set the pulse duration.
Normally Open One Shot Low
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event
occurs. The output will only reset when the time specified in the Time
Parameter expires. The output will run for the full duration and cannot
be manually reset.
Normally Open One Show Low + Retrigger
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event
occurs. The output will retrigger each time the event occurs. The
output will reset when the one shot time has expired.
This polarity is ideally suited for security lighting control. A sensor
can be used to trigger an output event and then each time the senso
triggers, the output will operate. The light will turn off when the one
shot timer expires.
Normally Open One Shot Low + Reset
Output is normally open circuit and will switch to GND when the
event occurs. The output will reset when the one shot timer expires or
when the event has restored. This means the operation of the output
can be shortened based on the event and or the programmed time
parameter.
Normally Low Going Open
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit when the
event occurs. The output will reset when the output event restores.
Time parameters do not apply to this polarity type.
Normally Low Going Open With Pre Delay
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit when the
event occurs provided the time parameter has expired. The output
will reset when the output event restores. Time parameters will only
set the Pre Delay when this polarity is selected.
Normally Low Latching Open
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit when the
event occurs. The output can only be reset maually usning the output
Command Menu.
Normally Low Pulsing Open
Output is normally LOW and will pulse OPEN when the event occurs.
The output will reset when the output event restores. Use the Time
Parameter to set the pulse duration.
Normally Low One Shot Open
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit when the
event occurs. The output will only reset when the time specified in
the Time Parameter expires. The output will run for the full duration
and cannot be manually reset.
Normally Low One Show Open + Retrigger
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit when the
event occurs. The output will retrigger each time the event occurs.
The output will reset when the one shot time has expired.
Normally Low One Shot Open + Reset
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit when the
event occurs. The output will reset when the one shot timer expires
or the event has restored. This means the operation of the output
can be shortened based on the event and or the programmed time
parameter.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
Horn Speaker (Output 1 or 2 Only)
This polarity can only be used for Output 1 and Output 2 when a horn
speaker has been connected.
Outputs > Properties >
Output Options
Timed Outputs
Outputs > Properties >
Time Parameter
0
0
0
Hour

0
0
0
0
Minute
0
MENU 4-1-4
0
Seconds
0
0
0
10th Sec
The time base parameter is only applicable for output types
that are programmed as one shot or pulsing. Program 0 to
255 for each of the units (Hour, Minute, Seconds and 10th of
a Second) for the time parameter. If required, add the units
together to give the total one shot time or pulsing on/off time.
1)
Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [4] and select the output you want to
program from the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can
directly enter the output number then press [OK].
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the length of time for each
parameter. If required, use the [←] and [→] keys to move the
cursor left and right between each time parameter.
Output Timing Op001
Hrs Min Sec Tenth
000 005 000 000
Press  OK to SAVE
3)
One Shot Mode
The time base is the length of time that the output will
operate. For Example you may want a strobe output to operate
for 1 hour, Either of the examples below will achieve the 1 hour
time.
MENU 4-1-5
1
Do Not Operate On Low Battery
Y
2
Display Overload
Y
3
Report Overload
Y
4
Display Device Fail
Y
5
Report Device Fail
Y
6
Alarm On Device Fail
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Display Status Message
N
1)
Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [5] and select the output you want to
program from the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can
directly enter the output number then press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
 Off On Low Battery
 Display Overload
 Report Overload
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.

Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Do Not Operate Output On Low Battery
This option forces the control panel not to operate the output when
a low battery or missing battery condition is in effect. Once the low
battery condition restores, the output will return to normal operation.
Display Output Overload
This option allows the keypad to display a trouble condition when
output current exceeds its maximum limit.
Report Output Overload
Total Time
Hour
Minute
Seconds
10th Sec
60 Minutes
001
000
000
000
60 Minutes
000
060
000
000
Pulsing Mode
The time base is the unit of time that the output will pulse on
and off. If the time base is programmed for 60 seconds, the
output will pulse on for 60 seconds and then off for 60 seconds
(repeat) until the output is reset.
This option allows the panel to send an Output Overload report when
the output current exceeds its maximum limit. A restore report will be
sent when the current overload condition no longer exists.
Display Missing Output Device
This option allows the panel to display a trouble condition when it
detects that the output device is missing. The trouble condition will
clear when the output device has been restored.
Report Missing Output Device
This option causes the panel to send an Output Trouble report when
it detects that the output device is missing. A restore report will be
sent when the when the output device is reconnected.
Outputs > Properties >
Macro Group

MENU 4-1-6
Reserved
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
8-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
Output Testing
Outputs > Testing >
Outputs > Testing >
-
External Siren Test
MENU 4-9-0
This menu allows you to test the operation of any output
programmed as event type 36 (External Audible) or Event Type
39 (Fire Alarm) for 5 seconds.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [0] and select the area you want to
test the external sirens in from the list then press [OK].
A001 Area
A002 Area
A003 Area
Press 
2)
MENU 4-9-2
This menu allows you to test the any outputs programmed as
event type 48, Strobe light. This test is not timed and needs to
be manually stopped when testing is completed.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [2] and select the area you want to
test the strobe lights in from the list then press [OK].
2)
Any outputs programmed for event type 48 in the chosen area
will now operate. The keypad will display the following during
the siren test.
1 Name
2 Name
3 Name
OK or MENU
Strobe Activated. Will
Reset On Exit
Any outputs programmed for event type 36 or 39 in the chosen
area will now operate. The keypad will display the following
during the siren test.
Press OK or MENU
3)
External Audible
Testing Press any key to
Abort
Press OK or MENU
3)
-
Strobe Siren Test
Check and verify that the strobe lights are working correctly
then press [OK] to end the test.
When the siren test is complete, the keypad will display the
following:
Testing Complete Press
OK to continue
Press OK or MENU
4)
Press [OK] to exit.
Outputs > Testing >
Internal Bell Test
-
MENU 4-9-1
This menu allows you to test any output programmed as event
type 37 (Internal Audible) or event type 39 (Fire Alarm) for 5
seconds.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [1] and select the area you want to
test the internal sirens in from the list then press [OK].
2)
Any outputs programmed for event type 37 or 39 in the chosen
area will now operate. The keypad will display the following
during the siren test.
Internal Audible
Testing Press any key to
Abort
Press OK or MENU
3)
When the bell test is complete, the keypad will display the
testing complete message.
4)
Press [OK] to exit.
8-8
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
Output Event Type Table
0 = Disabled
1 = Battery Trouble
2 = AC Trouble
3 = Telephone Line Trouble
4 = Comm Fail – Destination 1 / 2
5 = Third Dialler Attempt
6 = Destination 1 Reporting
7 = Destination 2 Reporting
8 = Destination 1 or 2 Kiss Off
9 = Destination 1 Kiss Off
10 = Destination 2 Kiss Off
11 = Dialler Disabled
12 = Output Device Missing
13 = Output Trouble
14 = Panel On Line
15 = Incoming Call
16 = System Trouble
17 = Box Tamper
18 = Zone Trouble
19 = Zone Mirror
20 = Zone Alarm
21 = Area Disarmed
22 = Area Armed (Any)
23 = Area All On
24 = Area Part On
25 = Area Part 2 On
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
O
P
P
P
P
Z
Z
Z
A
A
A
A
A
26 = Entry Time
27 = Exit Time
28 = End Of Exit Time
29 = Chime On
30 = Chime Zone Triggered
31 = Auto Arm Pre-Alert
32 = Ready To Arm All On
33 = Ready To Arm Part On
34 = Ready To Arm Part 2 On
35 = Closing Report Sent OK
36 = External Siren (Spk Beeps)
37 = Internal Siren (Spk Beeps)
38 = Alarm Any (silent or Audible )
39 = Fire Alarm
40 = Burglary Alarm
41 = Silent Alarm
42 = Duress Alarm
43 = Keypad Medical
44 = Keypad Fire
45 = Keypad Panic
46 = Device Tamper
47 = Access Denied
48 = Strobe
49 = Smoke Sensor GND
50 = Sensor Watch
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
51 = Senior Watch
52 = Exit Error
53 = RF Key Fob Function 1
54 = RF Key Fob Function 2
55 = Output Pre- Alert
56 = Follow PIN Code
57 = Part Entry Time
58 = Time Schedule
59 = Temperature Alarm
60 = Access Group
A
A
A
A
A
U
A
S
K
G
(A) = Area Event Assignment
(P) = Panel Event Assignment
(O) = Output Event Assignment
(Z) = Zone Event Assignment
(U) = User Event Assignment
(S) = Schedule Event Assignment
(G) = Access Group Event Assignment
(K) = Keypad
Table19: Output Event Types
Output Default Table
The table below lists the default values for all Output parameters in the Solution 64. Outputs 1 to 3 are High current digital
outputs and Output 4 is the onboard relay output. Outputs 5 to 8 are available when the optional Output Relay Expander Board
(CM110) is fitted. Options marked N/A = Not Applicable.
Programming Option
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
External
Siren
36
(External
Siren)
1
14
Strobe
Light
Output 6
Name
Output 7
Name
Output 8
Name
0
0
0
0
1
6
Internal
Siren
37
(Internal
Siren)
1
6
Output 5
Name
48
(Strobe)
Smoke
Sensor PWR
49
(Smoke
Sensor GND)
1
11
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
000
005
000
000
008
000
000
000
000
000
010
000
000
005
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N
N
N
N
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Output Name
Event Type
Event Assignment
Output Polarity
Time Parameter
N° Of Hours
N° Of Minutes
N° Of Seconds
N° Of 1/10 Seconds
Output Options
Do not Operate If Low Battery
Display Output Overload
Report Output Overload
Display Missing Output Device
Report Missing Output Device
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 20: Output Default Table
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
8-9
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Output Programming
This page left intentionally blank
8-10
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 9
Comms Programming
The Solution 64 has a built in dialler that connects directly to
a standard PSTN telephone line. To program the dialler you
must set the telephone number to dial and then the reporting
format to send the information in.
The command menu allows you to set the Domestic Numbers,
initiate a SolutionLink Upload / Download session, turn on/off
call forwarding.
There are two independent reporting routes that define where
a reportable event should be sent, by default all events will
report through route 1. Reportable events in the system are
categorised into Alarm, System, Emergency, Open/Close and
Test. This means that you are able to steer these different event
categories to different report routes. A report route is just like
an independent dialler, it has its own primary and secondary
telephone numbers and reporting format.
Example: Route 1 = CID, Route 2 = SMS
Comms Programming Commands
Comms > Commands >
Set Domestic Number
MENU 5-0-0
Domestic reporting allows the Solution control panel to send
reports to personal telephone numbers (eg. mobile telephone
numbers). Up to three different telephone numbers can be
programmed, each having a maximum of 32 digits.
Each telephone call needs to be acknowledged by the user
that answers the incoming call. If the user fails to acknowledge
the call, the Solution control panel will make another attempt
to report until the maximum number of call attempts has been
reached. To acknowledge the call, the user needs to press the
[#] key on their telephone.
1)
If you set the reporting route for Open/Close as Route 2 and all
other events to Route 1, then all reports will be sent to route
1 in Contact ID format and then all open close reports will be
sent through SMS. This is very handy if you want to monitor
what time your children come home from school or cleaners
entering or leaving your premises.
Telephone numbers can be 32 digits long and characters 09 * # and , are supported with the comma representing a 2
second pause. Destination route 1 and route 2 both have their
own Primary and Secondary telephone numbers, Domestic
reporting has 3 telephone numbers and remote access has one
call back number.
-
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [0]. If the panel has not configured to
report via domestic format, the keypad will display the
following:
Domestic Reports Not
Enabled. Please Contact
Your Security Service
Provider
2)
If the control panel has been configured to report via domestic
format, the keypad will display information for telephone
number 1.
3)
Using the arrow and numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
first telephone number. You can change a single digit in the
number by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special
characters (eg. , = pause * or # etc), use the up and down arrow
keys. To clear all text from the cursor position to the right,
press the [OFF] key.
There are two back to base monitoring formats called CID and
SIA, both formats are all predefined so the system will always
send the same reporting code for the same event. The type
of zone selected under zone type automatically determines
the reporting code to the base station. If a zone is defined
as Medical then when it goes into alarm the report will be
Medical Alarm, if a zone is programmed as a Fire zone then the
report will automatically be Fire Alarm.
Domestic Phone Number 1
97417_
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
3)
When the first number is complete press [OK] to program
telephone number 2 if required.
i
See MENU 5-4-0 and 5-4-1 to configure the Transmission Format
to Domestic Reporting.
Note
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
9-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Domestic Phone Number 2
i
86538_
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
5)
See MENU 5-1-6 and MENU 5-1-7 to program the Call Forward
ON and Call Forward OFF number sequence.
Note
When the second number is complete press [OK] to program
telephone number 3 if required.
Comms > Commands >
Check Web Email
Domestic Phone Number 3
-
MENU 5-0-3
-
MENU 5-0-4
Reserved
73653_
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Comms > Commands >
Email System Log
7)
When finished press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
cancel.
Phone Number Programming
Comms > Commands >
Call
/
Answer
(SolutionLink)
RAS
--
MENU 5-0-1
If the phone is ringing and this command is enetered, then the
panel will answer the call and attempt to start a SolutionLink
RAS session.
Comms > Commands >
-
MENU 5-0-2
This command allows you to turn on and off the call forward
feature. When you turn on call forwarding, the panel will
automatically activate and de-activate the call forward on and
call forward off sequence accordingly when you turn Area 1 All
On and Off (arm and disarm).
1)
1
If the call forward status is ON, the keypad will display:
Call Forward On/Off
Call Forward is ON
To Turn OFF, Press OFF
To Go Back Press OK
4)
9-2
To toggle call forward on, press the [ON] key or press the [OFF]
key to turn call forward off.
Press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to cancel.
Digits
MENU 5-1-0
32
The number prefix is global for all telephone numbers
programmed in both Destination 1 and Destination 2
(including the domestic telephone numbers and call forward
sequences). the prefix will be dialled immediately before the
number.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current Telco Number Prefix.
Number Prefix P001
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the telephone
number prefix. You can change a single digit by scrolling the
cursor left or right. For special characters including, pause, *
or #, use the up and down arrow keys.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Comms > Telephone Number >
Primary Dest 1
1
3)

The number prefix allows you to program the customer
account number and pass code (PIN) to access the telephone
line exchange when using a pre-paid telephone account
(e.g. Telstra Communic8 Pre-Paid Home account), or when a
number followed by a pause is required to get an outside line
on a PABX system.
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [2]. If the call forward status is OFF,
the keypad will display:
Call Forward On/Off
Call Forward is OFF
To turn ON, Press ON
To Go Back Press OK
2)
Comms > Telephone Number >
Number Prefix
This command allows you to initiate a modem call to an off-site
computer for programming changes or updates. The off-site
computer must be connected to the telephone line that is
programmed in the call back telephone number and be set to
wait for an incoming call from the same customer that initiates
the modem call.
Call Forward On/Off
Reserved

Digits
MENU 5-1-1
32
This menu sets the primary telephone number for Report
Destination 1. This will typically be the primary base station
receiver number.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
1)
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Primary Telephone Number for Destination 1.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Primary Dest 1 P001
Comms > Telephone Number >
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Secondary Dest 2
1
2)
3)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the telephone
number. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor
left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use
the up and down arrow keys.
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.

MENU 5-1-4
Digits
32
This menu sets the secondary telephone number for
Destination 2. This location will typically be required when the
panel is configured for dual reporting.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [4]. The keypad will display the
current Secondary Telephone Number for Destination 2.
Comms > Telephone Number >
Secondary Dest 1
1

Digits
MENU 5-1-2
Secondary Dest 2 P001
32
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
This menu sets the secondary telephone number for
Destination 1. This will typically be the secondary base station
receiver number.
1)
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the telephone
number. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor
left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use
the up and down arrow keys.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Secondary Telephone Number for Destination 1.
Secondary Dest 1 P001
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Comms > Telephone Number >
2)
3)
First
Number
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Second
Number
Comms > Telephone Number >
Primary Dest 2
1

Digits
MENU 5-1-3
32
This menu sets the primary telephone number for destination
2. This location will typically be required when the panel is
configured for dual reporting.
1)
-
Domestic
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the telephone
number. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor
left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use
the up and down arrow keys.
Third
Number
MENU 5-1-5
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
Refer to Menu 5-0-0 for instructions on Domestic Phone
Number setup.
i
Note
Up to 3 Phone numbers can be entered for Domestic dialing.
Press [OK] after each telephone number is entered to save and
move to the next number.
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current Primary Telephone Number for Destination 2.
Primary Dest 2 P001
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the telephone
number. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor
left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use
the up and down arrow keys.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
9-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
1)
Comms > Telephone Number >
-
Call Forward On
1
•
MENU 5-1-6
Digits
6
1
,
*
5
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [7]. The keypad will display any
current Call Forward Off sequences.
Call Forward Off N001
32
#
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
The panel is able to activate certain Telco services such as
Call Forwarding when the system is armed. Call forwarding
means that your customer will no longer need to remember
to manually activate the Call Forward On feature via the
telephone before leaving.
2)
MENU 5-1-6 allows you to program the Call Forward On
number sequence. When armed the panel will automatically
seize the phone line and dial the number sequence and then
hang up.
Using the numeric keys, enter all digits for the sequence. You
can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right.
For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and
down arrow keys.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
In Australia, a typical sequence for activating the Call-Forward
On feature (All Calls) might be:
Comms Properties
Comms > Properties >
*61 0416123456 *20 #
Call Attempt Count

*61 diversion type - Call Forward On - Immediate.
0416123456 Telephone number that you want calls to be
diverted to. Example shows mobile number.
*20 20 second delay
# end of sequence
1)
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [6]. The keypad will display any
current Call Forward sequnces.
Call Forward On N001
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter all digits for the sequence. You
can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right.
For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and
down arrow keys.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
0
-
1
#
At factory default, the maximum number of call attempts
per event is 6 when reporting to a single destination and 12
attempts when reporting to 2 destinations. (6 attempts per
destination)
Domestic dialling also follows the call attempt count.
However, the call attempt count will be spread over total
phone numbers programmed for domestic reporting, ie. if
three domestic telephone numbers are programmed and the
call attempt count is 6, the panel will dial telephone number
1, telephone number 2 and telephone number 3, then repeat
once giving a total of 6 attempts). if the call is acknowledged
no further calls will be made for that event.
1)
Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current number of call attempts per destination. (Default = 6).
Call Attempt Count N001
MENU 5-1-7
Digits
6
1
6
This menu programs the maximum number of call attempts
the panel will make per destination in order to deliver the
report signal.
Comms > Telephone Number >
Call Forward Off
MENU 5-2-0
06
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
32
#
The panel is also able to deactivate certain Telco services
such as Call Forwarding when the system is disarmed. This
means that your customer will no longer need to remember
to manually deactivate Call Forwarding when they disarm the
system.
MENU 5-1-7 allows you to program the Call Forward Off
number sequence. When disarmed the panel will automatically
seize the phone line and dial the number sequence and then
hang up.
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the required number of call
attempts per destination.Valid entries are 1 to 15. 0 = reporting
disabled
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
i
Setting the Call Attempt count to zero will disable all reporting
for Detination 1 and Destination 2
Note
In Australia, a typical sequence for deactivating the CallForward On feature (All Calls) might be:
*61 #
*61 = diversion type - Call Forward On - Immediate.
# = end of sequence
9-4
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Extend Handshake Wait Period To 1 Minute
Comms > Properties >
Dialler Options
1)

MENU 5-2-1
1
Dialler Enabled
Y
2
Pulse Dialling
N
3
Dial Tone Detect
Y
4
Busy Tone Detect
N
5
Reserved
Y
6
Extend Handshake Wait Period To 1 Minute
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Abort Failed Reports
Y
Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Dialler Options.
 Dialler Enabled
Pulse Dialling
 Dial Tone Detect
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Dialler Enabled
This option enables the dialler reporting function. When disabled, all
dialler reporting will stop.
This option sets the panel to wait for up to 60 seconds to receive a
valid handshake signal from the base station receiver. The handshake
tone indicates to the panel that it has reached the security company’s
base station receiver and can now send it’s pending reports.
If this option is disabled the handshake wait time will default to 30
seconds.
Abort Failled Reports
Setting this option will cause a failled report to be flagged in the log
and no further reports will be made for that event.
i
Comms > Properties >
Phone Line Options
1)
If this option is disabled the panel will blind dial.
Busy Tone Detect
This option configures the panel to detect busy tone. If a busy tone
is detected during the dialling sequence, the panel will immediatly
hang up and move on to the next number in the sequence in an
attempt to get the report through as quickly as possible.
If this option is disabled, the panel will wait for a period of 30 seconds
before dialling the next telephone number in the sequence. The 30
second timer starts when the first digit of the first telephone number
is dialled.
Mirror Reporting To WEB Email
Reserved.

MENU 5-2-2
1
Display Telephone Line Fail
Y
2
Report Telephone Line Fail
Y
3
Alarm On Line Fail If Armed
N
4
Alarm On Line Fail If Disarmed
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Display Phone In Use
N
Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Phone Line Options.
 Display Line Fail
Report Line Fail
 Alarm L/Fail If ON
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
This option will configure the panel to use pulse or decadic dialling
rather than tone or DTMF dialling. DTMF dialling should always be
used unless the telephone network you are communicating on does
not support it.
This option configures the panel to start dialling as soon as it detects
dial tone on the line. This can speed up the dialing process by up
to 3 seconds. If no tone is detected the panel will blind dial after 4
seconds.
attempts has been reached .
Note
Pulse Dialling
Dial Tone Detect
A report will be failled if the number of programmed dial
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Display Telephone Line Fail
This option sets the panel to display a trouble signal on the keypad
display when the panel detects a teleco line fail condition.
Report Telephone Line Fail
This option sets the panel to send a line fail report when it detects a
telco line fail condition. If configured, the panel is able to report this
signal via an alternative reporting method such as the GSM cellular
network.
If no alternative route exists then the panel will send the signal and
restore when the PSTN line is reconnected.
Alarm On Telephone Line Fail If Armed
This option sets the panel to trigger an alarm when the telco line
fails provided that the area is turned All On or Part On. In a multi-area
system this option is global and will be triggered if only one area in
the system is in the armed state. The alarm will continue to sound
until a valid PIN is entered or the siren timer expires.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
9-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Alarm On Telephone Line Fail If Disarmed
This option sets the panel to trigger an alarm when the telco line
fails provided that the area is turned OFF or disarmed. In a multi-area
system this option is global and will be triggered if only one area in
the system is in the disarmed state. The alarm will continue to sound
until a valid PIN is entered or the siren timer expires.
Display ‘Phone In Use’
This option allows the keypad to display Phone In Use when the
telephone line has been looped by the control panel for either
incoming or outgoing calls. If this option is disabled, no indication is
provided on the keypad.
i
Note
The dialler status indicator LED located on the main panel will
always show the status of the dialler. See Section 3 - Wiring
Diagrams for more information.
Comms > Properties >
Country

MENU 5-2-3
0
0 = Australia
1 = New Zealand
6 = Portugal
11 = China
2 = Italy
7 = Hungary
12 = Hong Kong
3 = Greece
8 = Czech Republic
13 = Malaysia
4 = Cyprus
9 = Poland
14 = Brazil
5 = Spain
10 = Bulgaria
15 = Reserved
This menu automatically sets the dialling parameters including
dial and busy tones etc. for the country the panel is working in.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [3]. The keypad will display the
currently selected country. The default country is Australia.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the appropriate
country then Press [OK].
C001 AUSTRALIA
C002 NEW ZEALAND
C003 ITALY
Press  OK or MENU
4)
Press [OK] to confirm and save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
WARNING: Press OK to set
dialler to,
AUSTRALIA
Comms > Properties >
Set SMS Password
p
a
s
s
w

MENU 5-2-7
d
This menu sets the SMS password which is required whenever
SMS reporting is selected. The password will typically be
defined by the service provider or Telco carrier who you are
using to route the message.
By default the SMS password is set to suit the Telstra Network
in Australia.
1)
Enter [MENU] + 5+2+7. The keypad will display the current SMS
password.
2)
Use the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the password is complete, press [OK]. At any time you
can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor
position to the end of the line.
SMS Pager Password
passwd
Press  OK to SAVE
i
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Note
Comms > Remote Access >
Call Back Number
1

MENU 5-3-0
Digits
32
This menu sets the call back telephone number which can be
used to establish a SolutionLink RAS connection to the panel
for remote programming. The remote computers modem
should be connected to this number and Solutionlink should
be set to wait for an incomming call.
The installer or customer can force the panel to dial this
number by entering MENU 5-0-1.
For higher security the panel can be configured to always
use this number for callback verification when establishing a
SolutionLink remote access connection. The following steps
outline the callback procedure.
Step 1) Use Solutionlink RAS to call panel from remote computer.
i
Note
For correct dialler operation, you must make sure that the
correct country selection is made for your location. If your
country is not listed here please contact your Bosch distibutor.
Step 2) Panel will answer, acknowledge the request and then hang up.
Step 3) Panel will then dial the callback number.
Step 4) SolutionLink will answer the call and establish a RAS session.
i
See MENU 5-3-4 to force Callback Verification for every RAS
session.
Note
9-6
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
1)
If the event log reaches 100% capacity before a SolutionLink
RAS session is established then the system will send a ‘Log
Overflow’ report. The panel will also log these events in its
memory.
Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current Call Back telephone number if programmed.
Call Back Number N001
Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current threshold limit. The default is 70% full.
1)
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Log Threshold N001
2)
3)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the Call Back
number. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor
left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use
the up and down arrow keys.
Note
Using the numeric keys enter the new threshold limit, then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving. There is no need to enter the % symbol.
2)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
i
070 %
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
You must add any area codes or other special access numbers
which are required to be able to dial the remote computer from
the panel phone line. Simply add these numbers before the Call
Back number.
i
Note
Each time a SolutionLink RAS session is established with the
panel, the log information will be uploaded to the SolutionLink
database where it can be reported on or archived for later use
Comms > Remote Access >
Comms > Remote Access >
RAS Security PIN

MENU 5-3-1
Ring Count

MENU 5-3-3
10
0 = No Answer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The RAS security PIN programmed here must match
the security PIN programmed in the customer file of the
SolutionLink RAS upload/download database otherwise a
connection to the panel cannot be established.
1)
1 to 15 = Answer Ring Count
This menu sets the number of rings the panel will wait until
answering an incoming call. Programming a zero will stop the
panel from answering any incoming calls.
Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current ring count.
1)
Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current RAS Security PIN. The default = 12345678.
Ring Count N001
RAS Security PIN
10-10 Rings
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
12345678
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the new RAS
security PIN. You can change a single digit by scrolling the
cursor left or right.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
i
Note
Comms > Remote Access >
Log Threshold

MENU 5-3-2
7
0
%
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
If answering machine bypass is required to allow a SolutionLink
connection to be made without the answering machine
answering the call, see MENU 5-3-4 — SolutionLink RAS Options
Comms > Remote Access >
SolutionLink
Options
The control panel can store up to 256 system events in its
built in history log. A newly installed panel will have 100% of
its log space available for new events (0% full). As the panel
starts to store events in the log, the capacity for new events is
reduced. The history log is 100% full when event 256 is stored
in memory. Event 257 will start to overwrite the oldest events
in the log.
When the Log Threshold option is programmed, the panel
will send a ‘Log Threshold’ report to the base station when
the event log reaches the percentage as set since the last
SolutionLink session.
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the required ring
count then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2)
1)
RAS

MENU 5-3-4
1
RAS Allowed
Y
2
Call Back Verification Required
N
3
Terminate RAS on Alarm
Y
4
Answer Bypass
Y
5
Answer Incoming Call Only If Armed
N
6
Remote Program Editing Only When Disarmed
N
7
Allow User Functions Via Remote Access Software
Y
8
Report / Log RAS Start / End Sessions
Y
Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [4]. The keypad will display the
current RAS options.
9-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Allow ‘User Functions’ Via Remote Access Software
 RAS Allowed
Callback Verify
 Abort RAS On Alarm
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
2)
Setting this option allows access to user functions via the RAS upload/
download software. If this option is not programmed, user functions
will be disabled.
Report RAS Start / End Sessions
Setting this option will cause the panel to report the start and end of
RAS programming sessions to the base station and the history log.
Comms > Remote Access >
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
3)
DTMF Options

MENU 5-3-5
1
DTMF Arming
Y
2
DTMF Disarming
N
RAS Allowed
This option allows you to configure the panel via the
SolutionLink RAS upload/download software using a PC.
3
DTMF User Functions
N
4
DTMF Quick Arm ([0] + [#])
Y
5
Reserved
N
There are two different methods of connection avialable;
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
1)
Direct Connect – via serial cable.
2)
Remote Connect – via telephone line.
i
Note
1)
See Direct Link and SolutionLink RAS Upload/Download
Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [5]. The keypad will display the
current DTMF options.
programming in Section 5 — Programming Overview for more
information.
Call Back Verification Required
Setting this option will force the panel to use call back verification for
all remote SolutionLink RAS sessions. See MENU 5-3-0 — Call back
Number for more information.
Terminate RAS On Alarm
If this option is programmed, the RAS connection between the panel
and the remote upload / download computer will be terminated if
panel registers an alarm that needs to be reported.
Answering Machine Bypass
Answering machine bypass allows you to establiish a RAS connection
to a panel when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine
connected on the same telephone line.
1)
Using SolutionLink call the paneland let the phone ring no
more than 4 times before hanging up.
2)
Wait a minimum of 8 seconds (but no more than 60 seconds)
before calling the panel again. This time the panel will answer
the incoming call as soon as it registers the first ring and the
connection will be established.
Answer Incoming Call Only If Armed
Setting this option will prevent the panel from answering an
incoming call unless at least one area on the system is armed. If all
areas are off the panel will not answer the call. This option would be
useful in a busy office when due to the large volume of incomming
calls answering machine bypass may not be effective.
Remote Program Editing Only When Disarmed
Setting this option will prevent a SolutionLink RAS connection to the
panel while any are is armed.
 DTMF Arming
DTMF Disarming
DTMF User Functions
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
DTMF Arming
Setting this option enables user to remotely arm one or more areas
on the panel using their PIN and a touch tone phone. This option
requires the Solution Interactive Voice module to be fitted.
DTMF Disarming
Setting this option enables users to remotely disarm one or more
areas on the panel using their PIN and a touch tone telephone. This
option requires the Solution Interactive Voice module to be fitted.
DTMF User Functions
Setting this option enables access to user DTMF functions using their
PIN and a touch tone telephone. This option requires the Solution
Interactive Voice module to be fitted.
DTMF Quick Arm
Setting this option allows users and control room operators to
remotely arm the system using a touch tone phone without the need
for a PIN.
To arm the system call the number which the panel is connected
to and when the panel answer you will here 3 beeps in accending
frequency if the panel is in the disarmed condition. Press [0] + [#] to
arm. You will hear 3 beeps in decending order when the panel arms.
i
All areas on the system will be armed regardless of there
condition when using the DTMF quick arm function.
Note
9-8
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Comms > Remote Access >
Voice Access Code

This default number may need to be changed depending on
the country and or telco exchange / PABX system being used.
Make sure that when the code is entered, no external phone
services are selected or activated. If they are, then change the
code to something else.
It is important to realise that this code is only used to start
the connection process. Once a connection is established, the
voice module will ask the user to enter their PIN before they
will be able to control the panel. The Voice Access Code is
shared by all users who need this type of access to the panel.
See the CM100 documention for more details.
Press [OK] to program CLI number 2.
CLI Number 2
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
4)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits for CLI number 2 .
5)
Press [OK] to program CLI number 3.
6)
When finished Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
i
Up to 3 Phone numbers can be entered for CLI Call Line
Identification for remote access detection. You must enter STD
code plus the compete number for this option to work. Press
[OK] after each telephone number is entered to save and move
to the next number.
Note
Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [6]. The keypad will display the
current DTMF options.
Reporting Options
Voice Access Code N001
Comms > Dialler Reporting >
TX Format Dest 1
9#
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Using the numeric keys enter the new Voice Access Code then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
CLI Number
First
Number
Second
Number
Third
Number

MENU 5-3-7
1
Digits
32
1
Digits
32
MENU 5-4-0
1
1 = Contact ID
7 = Domestic
2 = SIA
8 = Voice
13 = Reserved
3 = Serial STU
9 = Panel 1 (Node 1)
14 = Reserved
4 = GSM
10 = Panel 2 (Node 2)
15 = Reserved
5 = WEB MAIL
11 = Panel 3 (Node 3)
6 = SMS
12 = Panel 4 (Node 4)
This menu allows you to program the transmission format
or language the panel will use to send event reports to
Destination 1. The panel has two separate destinations
that reports can be sent to and each one can be set to use a
different transmission format depending on the application.
At factory default, all reports are routed to Destination 1.
1)
1

0 = Disable
Comms > Remiote Access >
Digits
32
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current Transmission Format for Destination 1.
TX Format Dest 1 N001
CLI Numbers (Call Line Identification) allows the Solution
control panel to answer an incoming call only when the
control panel identifies that the incoming call is from any one
of the three CLI numbers programmed. Up to three different
CLI telephone numbers can be programmed, each having a
maximum of 32 digits.
1)
3)
#
This option sets a 2 digit code which is used to access the panel
from any internal phone connected to the same telco line as
the panel. For this option to work, a CM100 Voice Module must
be connected to the panel.
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits for CLI number 1.
You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or
right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the
up and down arrow keys.
MENU 5-3-6
9
1)
2)
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [7]. The keypad will display
information for CLI number 1.
CLI Number 1
01-Contact ID
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Transmission
Format required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Transmission Formats 9 -12 are not applicable on the Solution
64 control panel and should not be programmed. Other
formats may require additional hardware or add on modules to
function.
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
9-9
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Comms > Dialler Reporting >
TX Format Dest 2
Comms > Dialler Reporting

MENU 5-4-1
Status Route
1
0 = Disable

MENU 5-4-3
1
0 = Report Events To Log Only
1 = Contact ID
7 = Domestic
2 = SIA
8 = Voice
13 = Reserved
1 = Report Events To Destination 1 + Log
2 = Report Events To Destination 2 + Log
3 = Serial STU
9 = Panel 1 (Node 1)
14 = Reserved
3 = Report Events To Destination 1 & Destination 2 + Log
4 = GSM
10 = Panel 2 (Node 2)
15 = Reserved
4 = Report Events To Destination 2 If Destination 1 Fails + Log
5 = WEB MAIL
11 = Panel 3 (Node 3)
6 = SMS
12 = Panel 4 (Node 4)
This menu sets the report destination that will be used to send
all system event reports.
This menu allows you to program the transmission format
or language the panel will use to send event reports to
Destination 2.
1)
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Transmission Format for Destination 2.
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current Status Report route.
Status Route
TX Format Dest 2 N001
01-Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
01-Contact ID
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Transmission
Format required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test Route
required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Comms > Dialler Reporting
Transmission Formats 9 -12 are not applicable on the Solution
Emergency Route
64 control panel and should not be programmed. Other
formats may require additional hardware or add on modules to
function.

MENU 5-4-4
0 = Report Events To Log Only
1
1 = Report Events To Destination 1 + Log
2 = Report Events To Destination 2 + Log
3 = Report Events To Destination 1 & Destination 2 + Log
4 = Report Events To Destination 2 If Destination 1 Fails + Log
Comms > Dialler Reporting
Test Route

MENU 5-4-2
0 = Report Events To Log Only
1 = Report Events To Destination 1 + Log
2 = Report Events To Destination 2 + Log
1
This menu programs the destination that all Keypad
emergency alarms are reported.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
3 = Report Events To Destination 1 & Destination 2 + Log
4 = Report Events To Destination 2 If Destination 1 Fails + Log
Emergency Route
This menu programs which destination will be used to send
both manual and automatic test reports.
01-Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Test Route.
Test Route
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [4]. The keypad will display the
current Emergency Route.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Keypad
Emergency route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
01-Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
9-10
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test Route
required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Comms > Dialler Reporting >
Swinger Dialler
Comms > Dialler Reporting >

MENU 5-4-5
0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Fire Report Delay
6
The Swinger Dialler count sets the maximum number of times
an individual zone can trigger an alarm during the current
arming cycle before it is locked out.
1)
SECONDS
Fire Report Delay
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [5]. The keypad will display the
current Swinger Dialler count.
000 seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Swinger Dialler
6
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Using the numeric keys, enter the new report delay time then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving. Valid entires are 0 to 255 seconds.
Comms Registration
Comms > Registration >
Customer
Using the numeric keys, enter the new Swinger Dialler count
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving. Valid entries are 0 - 15 / 0 = disabled

MENU 5-4-6
0
0
SECONDS

MENU 5-5-1
--
MENU 5-9-0
Reserved for future use.
Installer
Reserved for future use.
Comms Testing
Comms > Comms Test >
Send Test Report
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [6]. The keypad will display the
current burglary report delay time.
Burg Report Delay
000 seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
This menu allows you to test the reporting functions of the
Solution control panel by manually sending a Test report to
the receiving party (i.e. security company monitoring station,
mobile telephone etc).
1)
2)
MENU 5-5-0
0
This menu programs how long the panel will delay reporting
Burglary alarm reports. Only burglary (non-fire) zones that
have been programmed for Delay Report in MENU 3-1-7 —
Report Option will follow the Burglary Report Delay time.
1)

Comms > Registration >
Comms > Dialler Reporting >
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
0
Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [7]. The keypad will display the
current Fire Report Delay time.
Only zones that have been programmed for Lockout Dialler in
MENU 3-1-7 — Report Options will follow the Swinger Dialler
count.
Burg Report Delay
0
This menu programs how long the panel will delay reporting
fire zone alarm reports. Only fire zones that have been
programmed for Delay Report in MENU 3-1-7 — Report Option
will follow the Fire Report Delay time.
If this option is not programmed, the panel will continue to
report the alarm signal until the system or area is disarmed.
2)
MENU 5-4-7
0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Swinger Dialler can be used to prevent a faulty or run-a-way
PIR from continually re-triggering the zone and reporting to
the base station.
1)

Using the numeric keys, enter the new report delay time then
press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving. Valid entires are 0 to 255 seconds.
Enter [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will prompt that it is
in the process of sending a test report.
Comms Testing in
progress. Please wait.
To Go Back Press OK
2)
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
If the test is successful, the keypad will prompt:
9-11
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Communication Test
Successful.
Test Report Period
01-Every Day
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Press OK
3)
If the test fails, the keypad will prompt:
Communication Test
Fail.
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test Report
Period then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2)
Press OK
4)
Comms > Comms Test >
Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Test Report Options
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Time

MENU 5-9-1
Test Time
02
HH
:
00 am
MM
This menu programs the time of the day that the panel will
send the automatic Test Report to the base station receiver.
Automatic test reports are used to verify the panels ability to
report events via the telephone line on an ongoing basis.
1)
1)
MENU 5-9-3
1
Send Test Reports Only If No Other Report
N
2
Send Test Reports On Audible Time Out
Y
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current Test Report Options.
Test if No other Report
 Test On Siren Reset
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Test Report Time.
Test Report Time
02:00am
Press  OK to SAVE
2)

Use the left, right, up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Report time required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Send Test Reports Only If No Other Report
i
Scroll through the hours using the up and down arrow keys to
change the time from am to pm.
Note
Setting this option will cause the system to only send its automatic
Test report if no other area report has been sent within the test report
time period as programmed in MENU 5-9-2.
Send Test Reports On Audible Time Out
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Period

MENU 5-9-2
0 = No Test Report
1
Setting this option will delay the Automatic Test Report if the sirens
are running when the test report time expires. This effectively keeps
the telco line free to make any further alarm reports which may be
triggered while the sirens are running. The panel will send the cued
Test Report as soon as the siren run-time has expired.
1 = Every Day
2 = Every Week
3 = Every Month
This menu programs how often the control panel will send a
test report. Only one option can be programmed.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
9-12
Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Test Report Period.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Route

MENU 5-9-4
1
0 = Report Events To Log Only
1 = Report Events To Destination 1 + Log
2 = Report Events To Destination 2 + Log
3 = Report Events To Destination 1 & Destination 2 + Log
4 = Report Events To Destination 2 If Destination 1 Fails + Log
This menu programs which destination will be used to send
both manual and automatic test reports.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [4]. The keypad will display the
current Test Route.
Test Route
01-Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test Route
required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Comms > Comms Test >
Dial Number Test

MENU 5-9-5
This option provides a quick and easy way for the Installer
to test the communication path for the panel while they are
onsite without the need to trigger test reports and then verify
them with the base station. Once the telco wiring has been
completed, enter your mobile phone or another test number
into this location and press [OK]. The panel will then seize the
phone line and dial the programmed number.
1)
Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [5].
2)
Use the numeric keys to enter the the test number. You can
change a single digit in the number by scrolling the cursor left
or right. For special characters (eg. , = pause * or # etc), use the
up and down arrow keys. To clear all text from the cursor
position to the right, press the [OFF] key.
Enter Digits To Dial
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3)
Press [OK] when finished to start the test.
i
Note
The panel will make only one attempt to call this number per
activation. To perform multiple tests repeat the sequence. There
is no need to answer the test call.
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
9-13
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Comms Programming
This page left intentionally blank
9-14
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 10
Device Programming
This chapter covers the different device types and the
numerous programmable options which can be used to
control how a device operates.
The commands menu allows you to view the status of any
device in the system and will display its condition as well as the
temperature and voltage where available.
Keypads are the most common device used in the system
and must be assigned to a home area if they are to operate
correctly in a system. You are also able to set the contrast,
backlight and beeper volume to your own personal preference.
Devices > Commands >
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [1]. This system will display the
following.
RF Receiver RF001
D-Type
Press OK or MENU
2)
Device Commands
If no RF receiver has been programmed, the keypad will
display:
RF Receiver RF001 RF
Receiver is Not Fitted
No Further Information
Is Available
Devices > Commands >
--
MENU 6-0-0
This command will allow you to view the status of any keypad
connected to the panel. The following information is available:
 Line 1 = Keypad Number
1)
 Line 3 = Voltage, Temperature & Area Assignment.
Serial Status
Press  OK or MENU
The status line will scroll the keypad voltage, temperature and
home area while the keypad type and firmward version
number are continuously displayed.
Keypad 001 K001
Graphic + Prox v001
Volts =13.87
Press OK or MENU
3)
Press [OK] to exit.
Devices > Commands >
Kp001 Keypad 001
Kp002 Keypad 002
2)
3)
 Line 2 = Type of Keypad and firmware version
Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list and press [OK]. The display
will show the keypad status.
Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit when finished.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
MENU 6-0-1
This command will display the type of RF receiver currently
fitted to the panel. Only one RF receiver can be connected to a
single panel.
RF Devices can also be connected to the system and from
this menu you are able to set superSolution times, receiver
jamming, tamper options and more.
Keypad Status
--
RF Status
--
MENU 6-0-2
--
MENU 6-0-3
Reserved for future use.
Devices > Commands >
Output Status
The Output status function allows you to interrogate the
condition of the optional CM110 Output Expander Board when
fitted. Software version, voltage and temperature information
will be displayed.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [3] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the output in the list and press [OK]..
Ox 001 Output X001
Ox 002 Output X002
Press  OK or MENU
10-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Device Programming
2)
3)
The status line will scroll the keypad voltage, temperature and
home area while the keypad type and firmware version
number are continuously displayed.
Press
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the output expander
that you want to view, then press [OK] to select. Alternatively,
you can enter the expander number, then press [OK].
OutputX 001 Ox001
OutputX Version 1.00
Temperature = 26˚C
Press OK or MENU
3)
Keypad 001 Volume
L
2)
i
Note
Note
To view the current condition of an individual output either on
the main panel or on the CM110 Output Expander use
MENU 4-0-0 — Output Status.
Devices > Commands >
P / Supply Status
--
MENU 6-0-4
Reserved for future use
-
MENU 6-0-5
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the keypad number directly and
press [OK].
Keypad 001 Contrast
L
Devices > Commands >
--
MENU 6-1-1
This menu allows you to adjust the contrast of the keypad’s
LCD display to suit the application or customer preference.
Each keypad on the system can be adjusted separately.
Reserved for future use
Ethernet Status
all the way to the left. This will disable the keypad speaker for all
functions including key press beeps.
Keypad Contrast
1)
--
To completely silence the keypad speaker, simply move the slider
Devices > Keypads >
Devices > Commands >
GSM Status
OK to SAVE
Use the arrow keys to set the required volume level. Each time
a key is pressed, you will hear a beep indicating the new
volume level. When finished press [OK].
i
Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
H
Press
MENU 6-0-6
H
OK to SAVE
Reserved for future use
2)
Devices > Commands >
Access Status
--
MENU 6-0-7
Use the arrow keys to set the required contrast level. Each time
a key is pressed the contrast will adjust to the new level. When
finished press [OK].
Reserved for future use
Devices > Keypads >
Devices > Commands >
X10 Status
--
MENU 6-0-8
Keypad Backlight
Keypad Options
1)
Devices > Keypads >
-
MENU 6-1-0
10-2
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the keypad number directly and
press [OK].
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [2] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the keypad number directly and
press [OK].
Keypad 001 Backlight
L
This menu allows you to adjust the volume of the keypad’s
speaker to suit the application or customer preference. Each
keypad on the system can be adjusted separately.
1)
MENU 6-1-2
This menu allows you to adjust the brightness of the backlight
on the keypad’s LCD display. Each keypad can be adjusted
separately to suit the customers needs.
Reserved for future use
Keypad Volume
-
Press
2)
H
OK to SAVE
Use the arrow keys to set the required backlight level. Each
time a key is pressed the backlight will adjust to the new level.
When finished press [OK].
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Device Programming
3)
Devices > Keypads >
Home Area

MENU 6-1-3
1
This menu allows you to assign each keypad to a default home
area (Area 1 to 8). Only 1 home area can be programmed for
each keypad.
If a user toggles the keypad display to view a different area, the
keypad will automatically timeout and move back to the home
area if no key is pressed for a period of 60 seconds.
To prevent users from viewing areas which they do not have
access to, you will need to enable the PIN To Change Area
option. Setting this option will set the system to request a
user’s PIN before allowing them to view another area. The
system will only allow a user to view the areas they have access
to.
See MENU 6-1-4 — Keypad General Options.
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [3] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
1)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Home Area
required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
2)
switch on the keypad and they all must have a home area
programmed to work correctly. Area 1 is the default Home Area.
Setting this option configures the keypad to display a farewell
greeting when the user arms an area. The greeting will include the
user name if programmed.
Greeting On Disarm
Setting this option configures the keypad to display a welcome
greeting when the user disarms an area. The greeting will reflect the
time of day and include the user name if programmed.
 Good Morning Greeting = 00:00 to 11:59
 Good Afternoon Greeting = 12:00 to 17:59
 Good Evening Greeting = 18:00 to 23:59
PIN To Change Area
Setting this option will prevent a user from switching between
different areas on the keypad unless they enter a valid user PIN.
When this option is not set, users will be able to change the keypad
view to all other areas in the system regardless of whether or not they
have access to those areas.
Devices > Keypads >

MENU 6-1-4
1
Keypad Extinguish
N
2
Greeting On Arm
Y
3
Greeting On Disarm
Y
4
Enable Rear Tamper
N
5
PIN To Change Area
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Report Keypad Temperature
Y
8
Display Area Indicators
N
The above options can be configured independantly for each
keypad fitted to the system.
1)
Greeting On Arm
For this option to work, the keypad model being used must have the
on-board tamper switch fitted.
All keypads must be set to a unique address via the node select
General Options
Setting this option configures the panel to automatically turn off the
keypad backlighting after an inactivity period of 60 seconds. As soon
as a key is pressed or an alarm occurs, the keypad backlight will turn
on.
Setting this option enables the panel to trigger an alarm when the
keypad’s inbuilt tamper circuit becomes faulted. A tamper alarm
report will be sent to the base station, a tamper alarm restore will be
sent when the tamper has been reset.
01 - Area 1
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Note
Keypad Extinguish
Enable Rear Tamper
Home Area Kp001
i
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [4] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
Extinguish Keypad
 Greeting On Arming
 Greeting On Disarming
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Report Keypad Temperature
This option sets the keypad to report a temperature alarm to the base
station if the keypads temperature falls below or rises above the
minumum and maximum temperatures programmed in
MENU 7-7-3 — Keypad Hi/Lo Temp.
An output can be programmed to operate when a keypad hi/low
temperature fail condition occurs irrespective of whether or not this
option is set.
See MENU 6-1-5 — Beeper Options to set the keypad to always show
the current temperature in the display.
Display Area Indicators
This option sets the keypad to show the AREA ICON indicators in the
keypad display at all times. The Icons show the status of all areas on
the system without having to press any keys.
When the Area Icon is ON the corresponding area is armed and when
the Area Icon is OFF or not visible the corresponding area is disarmed.
Security System
DISARMED
Thu,Jan,05 11:22 am
2)
22ºC
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
10-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Device Programming
Devices > Keypads >
Beeper Options
Devices > Keypads >

MENU 6-1-5
Emergency Keys

MENU 6-1-6
1
Trouble Alerts
Y
1
Audible Keypad Fire
Y
2
Entry Warning
Y
2
Report Keypad Fire
Y
3
Exit Warning
Y
3
Audible Keypad Medical
Y
4
Chime Tone
Y
4
Report Keypad Medical
Y
5
Display Temperature
N
5
Audible Keypad Panic (Invisible If Not Set)
N
6
Reserved
N
6
Report Keypad Panic
N
7
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
The above options can be configured independantly for each
keypad fitted to the system.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [5] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
The above options can be configured independantly for each
keypad fitted to the system.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [6] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
 Trouble Alert Beeps
 Entry Warning
 Exit Warning
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
 Audible Keypad Fire
 Report Keypad Fire
 Audible Kpad Medical
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Trouble Alerts
Audible Keypad Fire
Setting this option will cause the keypad to sound a trouble alert tone
to notify the user that the panel has a trouble condition that needs to
be rectified. Press the [OK] to acknowledge the trouble condition and
stop the alert tone. Press the down arrow for more information on the
trouble condition.
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible alarm when a
Keypad Fire Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad. To
initiate a fire emergency via the keypad, press and hold the [4] + [6]
keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user PIN to reset the alarm
condition.
i
Note
See MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options if you would like to delay
the audible trouble alert tone during the night when the
panel is used in residential applications.
Entry Warning
Setting this option will cause the keypad to sound an entry warning
alert tone when the entry timer is running. The tone will stop when a
key is pressed or when the entry time expires.
Exit Warning
Setting this option will cause the keypad to sound an exit warning
alert tone when the exit timer is running. The tone will stop when the
timer expires.
Chime Tone
Setting this option will cause the keypad to sound a chime alert tone
when a chime zone is faulted. Chime zones are active when the area
is disarmed and are typically used to monitor the front door of a shop.
The chime alert tone will stop when the zone reseals.
Display Temperature
Setting this option configures the panel to always show the current
keypad temperature in the display. Each keypad can be set to display
its own temperature. It is possible to trigger a temperature alarm
based on the keypad temperature. See MENU 7-7-3 — Keypad Hi/Lo
Temp for more information.
Report Keypad Fire
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Fire report to the base
station when a Keypad Fire Emergency Alarm has been triggered via
the keypad.
Audible Keypad Medical
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible alarm when a
Keypad Medical Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad.
To initiate a medical emergency via the keypad, press and hold the
[7] + [9] keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user PIN to reset the
alarm condition.
Report Keypad Medical
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Medical report (event
43) to the base station when a Keypad Medical Emergency Alarm has
been triggered via the keypad.
Audible Keypad Panic
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible alarm when a
Keypad Panic Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad. To
initiate a panic emergency via the keypad, press and hold the [1] + [3]
keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user PIN to reset the alarm
condition.
i
If this option is disabled, a keypad panic alarm will not be visible
on the keypad display (i.e. Invisible Panic Alarm).
Note
10-4
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Device Programming
Report Keypad Panic
2)
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Panic report (event 44)
to the base station when a Keypad Panic Emergency Alarm has been
triggered via the keypad.
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Devices > Keypads >
Reserved

MENU 6-1-7
0

MENU 6-1-8
0
6
0
SECONDS
This menu programs how long a keypad will be quarantined if
the PIN retry count value is exceeded.
See MENU 1-5-1 — PIN Retry Count. The PIN retry counter is
reset when any area is armed or disarmed using a valid PIN.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Setting this option allows the panel to trigger an alarm when the RF
receiver tamper circuit is tripped.
Report Faulted RF Receiver Tamper
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF Receiver Tamper
report to the the base station when the RF receiver tamper circuit
is tripped. A restore report will be sent when the tamper circuit is
resealled.
Alarm On RF Receiver Jam Detect
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an alarm when the RF
Receiver detects a jamming signal. This signal may not be provided by
all compatible RF Receivers.
Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [8]. The keypad will display the
current keypad lockout time.
1)
Setting this option allows the panel to display a trouble condition on
the keypad when an RF receiver fail condition occurs.
Alarm On RF Receiver Tamper
Devices > Keypads >
Lockout Time
Display RF Receiver Trouble
Lockout Time
Report Receiver Jam Detect
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF Receiver Jam report
to the base station when the RF Receiver detects a jamming signal. A
restore report will be sent as soon as the jamming signal stops.
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Use the numeric keys to program the number of seconds the
keypad will be locked out for. Valid entries are 0 - 255, 0 = No
Lockout.
Alarm On RF Receiver Comms Fail
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit, else press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Report RF Receiver Comms Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an alarm when it is
unable to communicate with the RF Receiver.
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF Receiver
Comms Fail report to the base station when the panel is unable to
communicate with the RF Receiver. A restore report will be sent as
soon as communication is restored between the panel and the RF
receiver.
RF Receiver Op tions
Devices > RF Devices >
Receiver Options

MENU 6-2-0
1
Display RF Receiver Troubles
Y
2
Alarm On RF Receiver Tamper
Y
3
Report RF Receiver Tamper
Y
4
Alarm On RF Receiver Jam Detect
N
5
Report RF Receiver Jam Detect
N
6
Alarm On RF Receiver Comms Fail
Y
7
Report RF Receiver Comms Fail
Y
8
Reserved
N
This menu option allows you to configure the various RF
receiver functions. Only one RF reciever can be fitted per panel.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current receiver options.
 Display RF Rcvr Trouble
 Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper
 Report RF Rcvr Tamper
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Device > RF Devices >
SuperSolution Time

MENU 6-2-1
0
2
4
HOURS
This menu sets the global RF superSolution time for all RF
devices connected to the system.
RF transmitters (sensor devices) will send a supervisory test
signal approximately once every hour. The RF receiver expects
to receive this supervisory signal from every transmitting
device within the superSolution time period.
The panel will send a Missing report to the base station for any
RF device that fails to report within the superSolution time.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current RF superSolution time.
SuperSolution Time
024 Hours
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
10-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Device Programming
2)
3)
Using the numeric keys, enter the number of hours for the RF
superSolution time. Valid times are 0 - 255 hours, 0 = No
SuperSolution.
Report RF Keyfob Panic
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
RF Keyfob Function Key 1 = ‘Part On’
Setting this option will allow keyfob users to arm an area or all areas
of the system using function key 1 on the keyfob.
Device > RF Devices >
RF Device Options

Setting this option will cause the panel to send a Panic report to the
base station when a panic alarm has been initiated via a key fob.
MENU 6-2-2
1
Display RF Tamper
Y
Devices > RF Devices >
2
Report RF Tamper
Y
Add RF Keypad
3
Report RF Low Battery
Y
4
Report Lost RF Device
Y
5
Open Zone On Lost RF
Y
6
Audible Keyfob Panic
Y
7
Report Keyfob Panic
Y
8
Keyfob Function 1 Key = Part On
Y
This menu option allows you to configure various options and
functions for RF devices connected to the system.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current RF Device Options.
 Display RF Tamper
 Report RF Tamper
 Report RF Low Battery
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.

MENU 6-2-3

MENU 6-2-4

MENU 6-2-5
Reserved for future use.
Delete RF Keypad
Reserved for future use.
View RF I.D.
This command allows you to trap and view a transmitters I.D.
number when it has been forgotten or it is no longer legible
on the transmitter label. The device being tested must be
compatible with the RF receiver fitted to the panel.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [5]. The system will then begin
waiting for a valid trigger signal.
Waiting for Trigger
Press OK or MENU
2)
Trigger the transmitter by pressing any button on the keyfob
or by triggering the tamper switch on any sensor.
Type = Keyfob
RFID = 123456789
Display RF Device Trouble
Setting this option will cause the keypad to display a trouble
condition when an RF device fails.
Press OK or MENU
Report RF Device Tamper
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an RF Device Faulted
report to the base station when the devices tamper curcuit is tripped.
A restore report will be sent when the tamper circuit is resealled.
3)
To test another transmitter, repeat step 2. A beep will be heard
each time a new RFID is received and the new number will be
displayed.
Report RF Device Low Battery
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a report to the base
station when the RF device signals to the panel that it has a low
battery condition.
Unseal Zone On RF Device Missing
Setting this option will cause the panel to show a zone fault on the
keypad for any RF devices that are missing.
Report RF Device Missing
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a report to the base
station if the panel detects that an RF device is missing.
Audible RF Key Fob Panic
Setting this option allows users who have RF keyfobs to trigger an
audible panic alarm via the keyfob.
10-6
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Device Programming
Serial Device options
Flow Control
Devices > Serial Device >
Device Type

00 - No Handshaking
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
MENU 6-3-0
0
0 = Disabled
1 = Serial Printer
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Flow Control
required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
2)
2 = Computer
This menu sets the type of serial device that the panel will be
connected to.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current device type.
Devices > GSM Modem >
Report Format
Device Type N001

0
0 = SIA
00 - Diabled
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
1 = CID
2 = Domestic
Reserved for future use
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Device Type
required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Devices > GSM Modem >
Options

0
2 = Reserved
0
1 = 300 Baud
5 = 9600 Baud
2 = 600 Baud
6 = 19200 Baud
MENU 6-5-1
1 = Reserved
MENU 6-3-1
0 = No Device Connected
Reserved for future use.
Devices > GSM Modem >
3 = 1200 Baud
Options
4 = 2400 Baud
This menu sets the baud rate or speed that the panel will send
data to the serial device. This should be set to the same baud
rate as the serial device.
1)

0 = Reserved
Devices > Serial Device >
Baud Rate
MENU 6-5-0
Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current baud rate.
Baud Rate
00 - No Device Conn
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE

MENU 6-5-2
1
Display Troubles
N
2
Alarm On Tamper
N
3
Report Tamper
N
4
Alarm On Network Fail
N
5
Report Network Fail
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Reserved for future use.
Devices > GSM Modem >
2)
Options
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Baud Rate
required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Devices > Serial Device >
Flow Control

MENU 6-3-2
0 = No Handshaking
0
1 = Hardware
2 = Xon-Xoff
This menu sets the appropriate flow control for the device you
are connecting the serial board to. The flow control method
must be the same on both devices for a serial connection to be
established.
1)
Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current flow control setting.

MENU 6-5-3
1
Reserved
N
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Reserved for future use.
Devices > Ethernet >
Options
0 = Disabled

MENU 6-6-0
0
1 = Reserved
2 = Reserved
Reserved for future use.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
10-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Device Programming
Devices > Ethernet >
Options

MENU 6-6-1
0
0 = Reserved
1 = Reserved
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Reserved for future use.
Devices > Access Controller >
Options
2 = Reserved
MENU 6-7-3
Reserved
N
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
MENU 6-6-2
4
Reserved
N
Reserved
N
Devices > Ethernet >


1
Reserved for future use.
Options
7
1
Reserved
N
5
2
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
Reserved
N
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
7
4
Reserved
N
8
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Reserved for future use.
Devices > X10 Device >
Options
Reserved for future use.
Devices > Ethernet >

MENU 6-6-3
1
Reserved
N
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Reserved for future use.
Devices > Access Controller >
Options
MENU 6-8-0
0
0 = Reserved
Reserved for future use.
Options


MENU 6-7-0
0
0 = Reserved
1 = Reserved
2 = Reserved
Devices > X10 Device >
Options

MENU 6-8-1
0
0 = Reserved
Reserved for future use.
Devices > X10 Device >
Options

MENU 6-8-2
1
Reserved
N
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Reserved for future use.
Reserved for future use.
Devices > X10 Device >
Devices > Access Controller>
Options
Options

MENU 6-7-1
0
0 = Reserved
MENU 6-8-3
1
Reserved
N
2
Reserved
N
1 = Reserved
3
Reserved
N
2 = Reserved
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Reserved for future use.
Devices > Access Controller >
Options

MENU 6-7-2
1
Reserved
N
2
Reserved
N
3
Reserved
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
10-8

Reserved for future use.
» » E N D
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 11
System Programming
This section contains the different parameters required that are
system related features.
The commands menu will allow you to view the panel status,
system troubles, history log, factory default and entering
service mode.
Some of the key parameters in these menus are the setting of
the date/time under Clock and Schedules which control all the
automated time functions of the system.
open zones are displayed individually one per line.
When the keypad is in standby mode, system troubles and
open zones will be displayed on the status line of the keypad.
From this mode you can access the list of troubles by pressing
the down arrow.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the trouble event in the list then press [OK].
P001 System Trouble
Z001 Zone 1 Name
Z002 Zone 2 Name
Press  OK or MENU
System commands
System > Commands >
--
Panel Status
MENU 7-0-0
This command displays the following panel related information
on the keypad display.
2)
Line 1 Displays:
The panel number that you are getting information from (eg.
Node 1 = Panel 1 etc). The Solution 64 is only configured to
work with one panel.
Selecting System Trouble from the list will show the specific
panel version information to be displayed in the first two lines
while the third line of the display will scroll all current system
trouble events.
Panel 001 P001
Solution 64 Ver 1.02
Date and Time
Press OK or MENU
Line 2 Displays:
The panel name and firmware version number.
Line 3 Displays:
The current panel temperature, panel power supply voltage
and any system troubles which are in effect. This line scrolls all
events continiously
1)
Selecting a Zone from the list will show the currrent zone state.
Zone 1 name Z001
EOL=Open
Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [0] to view the panel status.
Panel 001 P001
Solution 64 Ver RC3 1.01
Temperature 28˚C
Press OK or MENU
3)
3)
Press OK or MENU
4)
If no System Troubles are in effect the keypad will display.
There are no
System troubles
Press [OK] to exit when finished.
Press OK or MENU
5)
System > Commands >
System Trouble
--
MENU 7-0-1
This command lists any system troubles which are currently
in effect on the system. Information is diplayed in a list format
allowing you to select a paticular event and then drill down to
view more specific information.
Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
i
When in stand-by mode keypads will display system trouble
events on the third line of the display.
Note
System trouble events such as Failure To Comminicate or Telco
Line Fail are grouped under System Trouble in the list while
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
11-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
System Trouble Messages
Buss Trouble
The following list shows the systems trouble messages
including a description of what has caused the trouble event to
occur. System Trouble events are also recorded in the System
Event Log.
This trouble message will display if the panel failed to communicate
to a system device which is connected to the LAN bus (e.g. keypad
etc).
Power Missing
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that either the
Installer PIN or User 1 PIN is still set to the factory default PIN. Change
the PIN to clear the fault.
This trouble message will display when the AC mains power supply to
the panel is disconnected or failled and will clear when the power is
reconnected. The Mains Power Icon in the keypad will also flash when
the power is missing.
Battery Low
This trouble message will display if the panel’s backup battery voltage
has dropped below 11.5 volts DC during a battery test and will clear
when the voltage is above 12.5 volts during a subsequent battery test.
Battery Missing
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the system’s
backup battery is missing or has been disconnected.
Battery Reversed
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the battery
connection leads are reversed.
Voltage Low
TBA
Voltage High
TBA
RF Rxer Missing
This trouble message will display if the panel detects the RF receiver
is missing or disconnected. The trouble will clear when the receiver is
reconnected.
RF Rxer Tamper
Default PIN Trbl
Date And Time
This trouble message will display if the system date and time has not
been set. Program the correct date and time to clear the fault.
Enclosure Tamper
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that it’s
enclosure tamper input is unsealled. Close the tamper switch to clear
the fault.
Panel Missing
This trouble message will display if the system detects that another
panel on the same system has been disconnected. This message is
only relevant when using the Solution-128 panel.
Siren Trouble
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the horn
speaker has been disconnected from the output terminal or is open
circuit. Horn speakers can be connected to Output 1 and or Output 2
and must be programmed as horn speaker outputs.
Telco Line Trouble
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the
telephone line has failed or been disconnected for a minimum of 30
seconds. The trouble will clear once the line has been restored for at
least 1 minute.
LAN Overload
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the tamper
circuit on the RF receiver is faulted.
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the current
load on the LAN+ power terminal has exceeded it’s maximum rating
of 1Amp DC. See MENU 7-3-2 — Fuse Options.
RF Rxer Jammed
Comm+ Overload
This trouble message will display if the connected RF receiver detects
RF noise levels that may prevent it from working correctly.
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the current
load on the COMM+ terminal has exceeded it’s maximum rating of
3Amp DC. See MENU 7-3-2 — Fuse Options.
RF Signal Low
This trouble message will display when a connected RF peripheral
device such as a RF PIR sends a low battery signal to the receiver.
Comms Trouble R1
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed to send
pending reports to Report Destination 1. All possible call attempts will
be made before the trouble message is displayed.
Comms Trouble R2
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed to send
pending reports to Report Destination 2. All possible call attempts will
be made before the trouble message is displayed.
Comms Test Fail
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed to send a
periodic test report signal to the base station.
Accessory Overld
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the
current load on the +12V accessory power terminal has exceeded it’s
maximum current rating of 1Amp D.C. See MENU 7-3-2 — Fuse
Options.
Call For Service
This trouble message will display when the Service Interval Timer
expires. To clear the message the installer must enter and exit
programming mode. See MENU 2-9-2 — Service Interval.
Time For Service
This trouble message will display when the User Test Interval timer
expires. To clear the message the user must enter and exit walk test
mode. See MENU 2-9-1 — User Test Interval.
Memory Fault
This occurs if the memory checksum is corrupted. To try and correct
this, enter programming mode and make a programming change like
a user name then exit programming mode. If this problem still persists
you must do a full system default.
11-2
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
Default Memory
System > Commands >
TBA
Domestic Default
Service Mode
This trouble message will display while the system is in Installer
Service mode. See MENU 7-0-8 — Service Mode
Phone In Use
This trouble message will display while the panel is using the phone
line. The message will clear when the line is released. This message
can be prevented from displaying in MENU 5-2-2 — Phone Line
Options.
--
MENU 7-0-3
This command will configure the control panel for Domestic
format reporting (eg. mobile telephones etc). All alarm restore
reports and open/close reporting options will be automatically
disabled. Therefore, only emergency, burglary and fire reports
will be sent.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [3]. The keypad will display:
To Reconfigure all panel
dialler programming to
domestic, Press OK or to
cancel,Press MENU
System > Commands >
History Log

MENU 7-0-2
This command allows you to review the last 256 history events
in chronological order. Each log entry provides a wealth of
information about the event including log even number, time
and date stamp, user and zone names and the report route
used.
2)
Press [OK] to start the default process or press [MENU] to
cancel and exit.
3)
The keypad will display the following message during the
default process and will exit back to the menu when finished.
Defaulting System
...Please Wait
When you enter the history log the most recent event will
always be shown first. Once the log memory is full it will wrap
and begin overwriting the oldest event in memory.
Each event will show:
Line 1 Displays:
Log Event Number, Event Date & Time and Report Destination
1 and /or 2 report status (S= Sent, P = Pending, F = Fail, A =
Abort and L = Log Only).
Line 2 Displays:
Displays the source of the event (eg. zone name and zone
number or user name and user number)
Line 3 Displays:
Displays the event description (eg. Walk Test Exited A1).
1)
System > Commands >
Factory Default
2)
Use the up and down arrows keys to scroll between history
events .
3)
When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [4]. The keypad will display:
This command will ERASE
All panel programming. To
Continue Press OK or
MENU to cancel
2)
Press [OK] to start the default process or press [MENU] to
cancel and exit.
3)
The keypad will display the following message during the
default process and will exit back to the menu when finished.
Defaulting System
...Please Wait
i
Note
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
MENU 7-0-4
This command will erase ALL programmable data and return
the control panel to factory default settings. Defaulting the
panel will NOT erase any history events that are currently
stored in the panel.
Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [2]. The keypad will display the most
recent event from the history log.
E001 Mon,01Oct 03:41 SL
Ur001 User 1 Name
Walk Test Exited A1
Press  OK or MENU

During a factory default both the Status and Dialer LED
indicators on the panel will flash very quickly to indicate
defaulting is still in progress.
11-3
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
3)
System > Commands >
Template Default

MENU 7-0-5
This command allows the installer to download preconfigured templates set up by the Installer on the MyAlarm
web interface. The installer can configure up to 4 separate
templates.
This feature will be available 2nd QTR 2005.
System > Commands >
Service Mode

MENU 7-0-8
This command allows the installer to put the panel into service
mode before performing system maintenance or upgrades.
When in service mode, the following functions are disabled. By
default, service mode will automatically terminate after 2 hours
if not terminated sooner by the installer.
 Zone Tamper
System > Clock >
Summertime On
At 2:00am
To turn service mode on, press [ON], or press [OFF] to turn
service mode off.
-
-
-
Day
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Summertime on.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the month, week
and year. Use the left and right keys to move the cursor
between the month, week and year.
3)
When finished press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
System > Clock >
in MENU 7-7-4 — Installer Options.
At 2:00am
Month
-
-
Week
-
MENU 7-1-2
-
-
-
Day
This menu allows you to program when day light savings end
during the year. This will allow the panel to automatically
adjust it’s built in clock accordingly. In Australia, daylight
savings moves backwards one hour at 3:00 am on the last
Sunday of March.
System > Clock >
Set Date & Time

-
Service mode will automatically exit after 2 hours if set to do so
System Clock
-
MENU 7-1-0
This menu allows you to set or adjust the panels internal clock.
Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current date and time.
To program Summertime Off, you will need to program the
month of the year (Jan to Dec), the week of the month (1 to 5)
and the day of the week (Sun to Sat) that daylight saving ends.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Set Date And Time
Use the left, right, up and down arrow keys to set the day,
month, year, hour and minute. Use left and right keys to scroll
the cursor left and right to between the month, day, year, hour
and minute.
Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Summertime off.
Summertime Off
Month Week Day
----- --Press  OK to SAVE
01-Jan-2004 04:37am
Press  OK to SAVE
11-4
-
Week
Summertime Off
Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit when finished.
Note
2)
Month
-
Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [8]. The keypad will display the
current service mode status.
i
1)
-
Summertime On
Month Week Day
----- --Press  OK to SAVE
Service Mode
Service Mode is OFF
To turn ON, Press ON
Press OK or MENU
3)
-
To program Summertime On, you will need to set the month
of the year (Jan to Dec), the week of the month (1 to 5) and the
day of the week (Sun to Sat) that daylight savings starts.
 Panel Tamper
2)
-
MENU 7-1-1
This menu allows you to program when day light savings start
during the year. This will allow the panel to automatically
adjust it’s built in clock accordingly. In Australia, daylight
savings moves forward one hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday
of October.
 Dialler
1)

-
1)
 Alarm Outputs
When the time is set correctly press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the month, week
and year. Use the left and right keys to move the cursor
between the month, week and year.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
3)
When finished press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Australian Daylight Savings Times
At the time of writing this document QLD, the NT and WA do
NOT participate in daylight savings.
Daylight Saving Ends
Turn Clock Ahead 1 hr
Turn Clock Back 1 hr
Sun 26 Oct 2003
Sun 28 Mar 2004
Sun 31 Oct 2004
Sun 27 Mar 2005
Sun 30 Oct 2005
Sun 26 Mar 2006
Sun 29 Oct 2006
Sun 25 Mar 2007
Entry Time 1

MENU 7-2-1
0
When a zone programmed as Delay 1 is triggered, the entry
time will start and the keypad will sound an entry warning
tone. Entry Time 1 can be programmed between 0 and 255
seconds.
Press [MENU] + [7] + [2] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Entry Time 1 delay.
Entry Time 1
020 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the required delay for Entry Time
1 in seconds. Valid times are 0 - 255 seconds 0 = No Entry Time.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Daylight Saving Begins
Daylight Saving Ends
Turn Clock Ahead 1 hr
Turn Clock Back 1 hr
Sun 5 Oct 2003
Sun 28 Mar 2004
Sun 3 Oct 2004
Sun 27 Mar 2005
Sun 2 Oct 2005
Sun 26 Mar 2006
System > Timers >
Sun 1 Oct 2006
Sun 25 Mar 2007
Entry Time 2

MENU 7-2-2
0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
System Timers
System > Timers >

MENU 7-2-0
0
6
0
SECONDS
This menu sets the exit time delay period for all areas on the
system. The exit timer starts when an area is armed in the On
and Part On modes. The keypad will sound an exit warning
tone while the exit timer is running. Exit delay time can be
programmed between 0 and 255 seconds.
4
0
SECONDS
This menu sets the entry time delay for zones programmed as
entry delay 2 zones. Entry Time 2 is common for all areas on
the system.
When a zone programmed as Delay 2 is triggered, the entry
time will start and the keypad will sound an entry warning
tone. Entry Time 2 can be programmed between 0 and 255
seconds.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current entry time.
Entry Time 2
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
0
This menu sets the entry time delay for zones programmed as
entry delay 1 zones. Entry Time 1 is common for all areas on
the system.
1)
In Tasmania, daylight savings begins at 2:00am on the first
Sunday in October and ends at 3:00am on the last Sunday in
March
Exit Time
2
SECONDS
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
In NSW, VIC, ACT, SA daylight savings begins at 2:00 am on the
last Sunday in October and ends at 3:00 am on the last Sunday
in March.
Daylight Saving Begins
System > Timers >
040 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Press [MENU] + [7] + [2] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current Exit Time.
Exit Time
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the required delay for Entry Time
2 in seconds. Valid times are 0 - 255 seconds 0 = No Entry Time.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the required Exit Time in
seconds. Valid times are 0 - 255 seconds 0 = No Exit Time.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
11-5
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
System > Timers >
Part Entry Time

2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the pre-alert time . Valid times
are 0 to 255 minutes. 0 = No Auto Arm Pre Alert.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
MENU 7-2-3
0
6
0
SECONDS
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
System > Timers >
This menu allows you to program the Part Mode Entry Delay
time also know as entry guard. When armed in Part Mode, all
active zones retain their normal functionality. ie. instant zones
will trigger instantly etc. The part entry timer allows all active
zones to have an entry delay when the the area is armed in
part mode regardless of their normal functionality.This can
help to prevent false alarms when people on site inadvertantly
unseal an active zone.
The panel can be programmed to automatically operate an
output via a schedule, see MENU 7-5-0 — System Schedules.
If a valid PIN code is not entered before the timer expires then
the alarm will trigger. Programming the entry guard time as
zero will disable this feature.
This menu allows you to program the Output Pre Alert count
down timer. The timer is used to warn staff or users that an
output is about to operate by sounding a tone on the keypad.
1)
Output Pre-Alert
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
000 Minutes
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
0
Press [MENU] + [7] + [2] + [5]. The keypad will display the
current Output Pre Alert Time.
Output Pre Alert
Using the numeric keys, enter the required delay for the Part
Entry Time in seconds. Valid times are 0 - 255 seconds, 0 = No
Part Entry Time.
0
Minutes
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Part Entry Time
2)
MENU 7-2-5
0
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [2] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current Part Entry time.

2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the pre-alert time. Valid times
are 0 to 255 minutes. 0 = No Output Pre Alert
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
System > Timers >
Senior Watch Time
System > Timers >
Auto Arm Pre-Alert

MENU 7-2-4
0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1
0
Minutes
This menu allows you to program the Auto Arm Pre Alert count
down timer. The timer is used to warn staff or users that the
system is about to auto arm by sounding a tone on the keypad.
To set up auto arming see MENU 7-5-0 — System Schedules.
If a valid PIN is entered during the pre alert time, the system
will delay the auto arm instruction for 1 hour. This sequence
will repeat on the hour untill the system is armed manually or
automatically.
For example if the system is programmed to auto arm at
8.00pm and the Pre Alert time is set to 10 minutes then at
7.50pm the system will begin sounding the Pre Alert tone on
the keypad. If a valid code is entered the tone will stop and the
system will remain disarmed. At 8.50pm the pre alert tone will
start again. If no code is entered the system will auto arm at
9.00pm.
1)
010 Minutes
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
11-6
MENU 7-2-6
0
0
0
Hours
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This feature can be used to verify that an elderly person is OK
or as a dead man timer for an onsite patrolman or security
officer.
This menu allows you to program the Senior Watch Time
period. The panel must register at least one burglary zone in
the programmed area op unseal and reseal during this time
period or the panel will report a Senior Watch alarm to the
base station.
A Senior Watch Restore will be sent when at least one zone is
usealled and resealled. Senior Watch monitoring is only active
when the corresponding area is in the disarmed state.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [2] + [6]. The keypad will display the
current senior watch time. (default = 0 hours).
Senior Watch Time
000 Hours
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Press [MENU] + [7] + [2] + [4]. The keypad will display the
current Pre-Alert Time.
Auto Arm Pre Alert

2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the new senior watch time. Valid
times are 0 to 255 hours. 0 = No Senior Watch Time.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
Display Clock Trouble
System Power Options
System > Power >
AC Options

MENU 7-3-0
Setting this option will cause the panel to show a Date and Time
System trouble if the power is removed from the system for any
period of time such as when performing a system upgrade or service
work. If this option is disabled then no system trouble will appear and
you will need to remember to set the correct time when you re power
the system.
1
Display AC Fail
Y
2
Report AC Fail
Y
3
Use AC To Synchronise The System Clock
Y
4
Random AC Report 2hour
N
5
AC Fail After 1 hour
N
System > Power >
6
Reserved
N
Battery Options
7
Reserved
N
1
Display Battery Fail
Y
8
Display Clock Trouble
Y
2
Report Battery Fail
Y
This menu option allows you to configure the AC Mains Power
system options.
3
Execute Battery Testing On Arming
Y
4
Arming Allowed On Low Battery
Y
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
5
Reserved
N
6
Reserved
N
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current AC Options.
 Display AC fail
 Report AC Fail
 Sync Clock To AC
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
3)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Setting this option will cause the panel to report an AC Fail to the base
station if the mains power has been missing for a period of 1 minute.
A restore report will be sent once the mains power has been restored
for one minute.
Synchronise System Clock to AC
Setting this option allows the panel to syncronise its internal clock
with the mains frequency (50hz). This option should be set unless the
panel is being used in an area where the mains power is unreliable.
Random AC Reporting 2hr
Setting this option allows the panel to randomly delay (up to 2 hours)
the AC Fail report. This option is used to prevent multiple Solution128 panels from reporting AC fail at the same time and should be left
disabled when using the Solution 64 panel.
Extend AC Fail To 1 Hour
Setting this option will cause the panel to only send an AC Fail report
to the base station if the power has been missing continuously for one
hour. The Mains Power icon will operate as normal.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Battery Options.
 Display Battery Fail
 Report Battery Fail
 Battery Test On Arming
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
Display AC Fail
Report AC Fail
MENU 7-3-1
This menu option allows you to configure the standby Battery
system options. The system is constantly monitoring the
battery condition with a dynamic battery test carried out every
4 hours.
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Setting this option will cause the panel to flash the Mains Power
icon as soon as the AC power supply has failed. If the power remains
missing continiously for 1 minute then a system trouble will be
registered on the keypad. When the AC power supply returns to
normal the Mains Power icon will remain on steady. If this option is
disabled then the system will not flash the Mains Power icon and no
system trouble will occur.

2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Display Battery Fail
Setting this option will cause the keypad to display a Trouble
condition when the panel detects that the standby battery is
disconnected or that its voltage is low. The trouble condition will
clear as soon as the panel has measured the battery voltage is 12.5
volts or greater.
Report Battery Fail
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a Low Battery report
to the base station when it measures the battery voltage has dropped
below 11.5 volts. A Low Battery Restore report will be sent when the
panel detects that the battery voltage is above 12.5 volts.
If the panel fails to detect the battery, or if it measures the battery
voltage below 10.2 volts, then a Battery Test Failed report will be sent.
A Battery Test restore will be sent when the battery is re-connected or
replaced.
Execute Battery Testing On Arming
Setting this option will cause the panel to perform an additional
dynamic battery test each time Area 1 is armed All On.
11-7
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
Arming Allowed On Low Battery
Display LAN + Current Overload
Setting this option will allow the system to be armed even though the
panel currently has a low battery condition.
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system trouble
message when the current load on the LAN+ terminal exceeds its
maximum rating of 1Amp.
When this option is disabled, the panel will not arm if there is a low
battery condition or if the battery is missing. The user will be notified
of the system trouble on the keypad and they will need to have the
fault rectified before the system or area can be armed.
i
Note
Any automatic arming schedules programmed will ignore this
option and the system will arm regardless of the low battery
fault condition.
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an Overcurrent
Trouble report to the base station when the current load on the LAN+
terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
Horn Speaker Options
System > Siren >
System > Power >
Fuse Options
Report LAN + Current Overload

MENU 7-3-2
1
Display COMM+ Current Overload Condition
Y
2
Report COMM+ Current Overload Condition
Y
3
Display +12V (Accessories) Current Overload Condition
Y
4
Report +12V (Accessories) Current Overload Condition
Y
5
Display LAN+ Overload Condition
Y
6
Report LAN+ Overload Condition
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Reserved
N
Tone

MENU 7-4-0
This menu allows you to customise the tone that is emitted
from the horn speaker when a non-fire alarm is triggered.
By changing the tone and speed, it is possible to program a
unique siren sound for each system when you are installing a
number of them in close proximity to each other.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current siren tone.
Tone
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
----------------------
This menu option allows you to configure the Fuse related
system options.
Press  OK to SAVE
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Fuse Options.
 Display COMM+ O/Load
 Report COMM+ O/Load
 Display +12V O/Load
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
3)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Display COMM + Current Overload
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system trouble
message when the current load on the COMM + terminal exceeds its
maximum rating of 3 Amps.
Report COMM + Current Overload
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an Overcurrent
Trouble report to the base station when the current load on the
COMM + terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 3 Amps.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to change the the siren tone.
3)
To test the new siren tone press [ON] to sound the siren and
press [OFF] to turn the siren off.
4)
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the desired siren tone is achieved
then press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
System > Siren >
Speed

MENU 7-4-1
This menu allows you to customise the speed of the siren tone
when a non-fire alarm is triggered. By changing the tone and
speed, it is possible to program a unique siren sound for each
system when you are installing a number of them in close
proximity to each other.
1)
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system trouble
message when the current load on the +12 V terminal exceeds its
maximum rating of 1Amp.
Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current siren speed.
Speed
S. . . . . . . . . . . . . F
---------------------Press  OK to SAVE
Report +12V (Accessories) Current Overload
11-8
affected by this menu option.
Note
Display +12V (Accessories) Current Overload
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an Overcurrent
Trouble report to the base station when the current load on the +12 V
terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
Only outputs programmed as Event Type 46 and or 47 will be
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to change the siren speed.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
3)
4)
To test the new siren speed press [ON] to sound the siren and
press [OFF] to turn the siren off.
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the desired siren tone is achieved
then press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Only outputs programmed as event type 46 and or 47 will be
Note
System > Siren >

MENU 7-4-2
1
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
5
This menu allows you to program the volume level of the radio
key speeker beeps which are heard when the system is armed
and disarmed using a radio keyfob.
1)
The Solution 64 has 8 schedules each with a start and stop
time as well as the day of the week and holidays. These
schedules can be used to operate outputs, arm and disarm
different areas at different times. When linked to Timer Groups
they will control a users access to the system.
To setup an Auto Arming time simply select a schedule that
is not used, set the name to something convenient and the
start time to the arming time you require. The stop time
should be set to 12:00am which prevents the system from auto
disarming.
affected by this menu option.
RF Beep Volume
System Schedules
Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current siren volume (default = 15).
Now set the function to Area On/Off and the Index to the area
to operate. If an index of zero is used then arming will occur for
all areas. Finally select the days which you wish auto arming to
occur.
To operate an output using a schedule select an unused
schedule, set the name to something convenient, set the start
time to when to operate the output, set the stop time to when
to turn the output off, select the schedule function as Operate
Output, set the Index to the output number, set the days of the
week to operate and you are finished.
Volume
System > Schedules >
15
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
S
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the new volume level. Valid
entries are 0 to 15 where 15 = the loudest volume and 0 = no
speeker beeps.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
i
c
1)
beeps will be effected by this menu option.
Note
3
This menu allows you to program how many times a zone
programmed for Lockout Siren can sound the siren during
each arming cycle.
At default, zones programmed for Lockout Siren will be able
to trigger the siren 3 times before being locked out. The count
will be reset when the system or area is next disarmed.
1)
d
Sk001
Sk002
Sk003
Press
MENU 7-4-3
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
e
u
l
e
1
N
a
m
e
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Schedule in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the Schedule number directly and
press [OK].
System > Siren >

h
MENU 7-5-0
This menu allows you to program a descriptive text name for
each schedule in the system up to 16 characters long. The
schdule name will be referred to in other schedule related
programming functions.
Only outputs programmed as Event Type 47, horn speaker with
Siren Swinger
-
Name
2)
Schedule 1 Name
Schedule 2 Name
Schedule 3 Name
 OK or MENU
User the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the Schedule Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time
you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current
cursor position to the end of the line.
Name Sk002
Schedule 2 Name
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current Swinger Siren count.
Siren Swinger
03
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Using the numeric keys, enter the new swinger siren count.
Valid entries are 0 to 15 where 0 = unlimited.
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
i
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Note
11-9
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
Day Sk001
S M T W T F S Hol
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Press 1-8 OK to SAVE
System > Schedules >
-
Time
Start Time
12
:
HH
MENU 7-5-1
Stop Time
00 am
12
MM
HH
:
00 am
3)
MM
This menu allows you to program the start time and stop time
of each schedule.
1)
2)
System > Schedules >
Function
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Schedule in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the Schedule number directly and
press [OK].
Sk001
Sk002
Sk003
Press
3= Operate Output
2 = Area Part On/Off
4 = Timer Group
1)
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [3] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Schedule in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the Schedule number directly and
press [OK].
Sk001
Sk002
Sk003
Press
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
2)
If the start time equals the stop time then the schedule is
Schedule 1 Name
Schedule 2 Name
Schedule 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Using the up and down arrow keys, select the schedule
function that you require then press [OK] to save and exit or
press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Function Sk001
disabled. A time of 12:00AM or --:-- is disabled.
00 - Disabled
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
System > Schedules >
-
Day
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
MENU 7-5-2
Fri
Y
Sat Hol
Y
N
This menu allows you to program which days of the week the
schedule will operate. To enable the schedule on a particular
day press the the number 1 to 8 which corresponds to the
day. For example to enable Monday press [2] and to disable
Monday press [2] again.
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [2] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Schedule in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the Schedule number directly and
press [OK].
Sk001
Sk002
Sk003
Press
2)
0
1 = Area On/Off
Note
1)
MENU 7-5-3
This menu allows you to program what function the schedule
will perform. There are a number of options which are
explained in more detail below. Only one option can be
programmed.
Schedule 1 Name
Schedule 2 Name
Schedule 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Using the arrow keys enter the required start and stop times in
12 hour format. To change from AM to PM scroll through the
hours using the up or down arrow keys.
i

0 = Disabled
Time Sk001
Start Time
Stop Time
12:00am
12:00am
Press  OK to SAVE
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Schedule 1 Name
Schedule 2 Name
Schedule 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Press numbers [1] to [8] to enable/disable the days of the week
that the schedule will operate.
Disabled
Setting this option will disable the schedule.
Area On/Off
Setting this option will cause the system to turn ON at the START
time and turn OFF at the STOP time. Setting the Time to 12:00 am will
disable the function and you will see --:-- am on the display.
The INDEX is the AREA to turn on and/or off, setting the index to zero
will arm and disarm all areas.
Area Part On/Off
Setting this option will cause the system to turn ON in Part Mode 1
at the START time and turn OFF at the STOP time. Setting the Time
to 12:00 am will disable the function and you will see --:-- am on the
display.
The INDEX is the AREA to turn on and off in Part Mode, setting the
index to zero will arm and disarm all areas.
Operate Output
Setting this option will cause the system to operate the output at the
start time and turn the output off at the stop time. Setting the Time
to 12:00 am will disable the function and you will see --:-- am on the
display.
The INDEX is the Ouput Number to turn on and off, setting the index
to zero will disable the output.
11-10
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
Timer Group
2)
Setting this option will assign the start and stop times to a Timer
Group to restrict user access to doors and areas. The INDEX defines
the Timer Group to link to. See MENU 1-4-4 — Timer Group for
information on assigning users to timer groups.
User the arrow and number keys to move and change text.
When the Holiday Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time
you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current
cursor position to the end of the line.
Name H001
System > Schedules >
Index

Holiday 1 Name
Press  0-8 OK to SAVE
MENU 7-5-4
0
This menu allows you to program which Area, Output or Timer
Group the Schedule will operate. The index type is determined
by the schedule function which was selected in MENU 7-5-3.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [4] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Schedule in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the Schedule number directly and
press [OK].
Sk001
Sk002
Sk003
Press
3)
i
System > Holidays >
Using the numeric keys, enter the number of the Area, Output
or Timer Group that the schedule is to follow then press [OK] to
save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
l
i
d
a
y
1
N
a
MENU 7-6-0
m
e
This menu allows you to program a 16 character text name for
each holiday.
1)
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [6] + [0] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Holiday in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the Holiday number directly and
press [OK].
H001 Holiday
H002 Holiday
H003 Holiday
Press  OK
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
01
Jan
01
Jan
DD
MM
DD
MM
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [6] + [1] and use the up and down arrows
to highlight the Holiday in the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the Holiday number directly and
press [OK].
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the holiday that you
want to change, then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter
the holiday number, then press [OK]. The keypad will display
the holiday start date:
Holiday Dates H001
Start 12am
Stop 12am
01 Jan
01 Jan
Press  OK to SAVE
3)
To program, use the left and right arrows to scroll the cursor
left and right between the holiday day and month options and
use the up and down arrow keys to scroll the day and month.
4)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
System > Holidays >
-
Stop 12am
1)
System Holiday s
The Solution 64 has proSolution for up to 8 individual holiday
time periods which can be used to allow or deny access to
users or to operate outputs via schedules. Holidays are defined
by setting a start and stop date so it is possible to create 1
system holiday that spans multiple days. For example the
holiday could start on the 1st Jan and end on the 5th Jan.
MENU 7-6-1
This menu allows you to program the start and stop date for
each holiday period. Holidays can be as short as one day or as
long as 364 days.
000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
o
-
Start 12am
Index Sk001
H
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Note
Start Stop Dates
Schedule 1 Name
Schedule 2 Name
Schedule 3 Name
 OK or MENU
Name
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 - Programming
i
Note
If the start day and month equals the stop day and month then
no holiday exists. There must be a difference between start and
stop dates.
1 Name
2 Name
3 Name
or MENU
11-11
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
System Options
System > System Options >
System > System Options >
General Options
Area Options

MENU 7-7-0

MENU 7-7-1
1
Area 1 = Common Area
N
1
Display LAN Fail
Y
2
First To Open Last To Close
N
2
Report LAN Fail
Y
3
Reset Siren All Users ( All Areas)
N
3
Alarm On LAN Fail
N
4
Power Up In Same State As Powered Down
Y
4
Reserved
N
5
Fault Acknowledge All Areas
Y
5
Can Change Own Code
N
6
Delay Trouble Beeps
N
6
Monitor Default PIN Codes
N
7
Reserved
N
7
PIN Always Required
Y
8
Reserved
N
8
Display Menu Numbers
N
This menu allows you to configure the General system options.
All options are global to users, areas and keypads.
This menu allows you to configure the Area system options. All
options are global to users, areas and keypads.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [0]. The keypad will display the
current General system options.
Area 1 Common
First Open Last Close
Reset Siren All Users
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
 Display LAN Fail
 Report LAN Fail
Alarm On LAN Fail
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Display LAN Fail
Setting this option allows all connected keypads to display a system
trouble when a device connected the the system LAN has failed to
communicate to the panel.
Report LAN Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to report which LAN device has
failed to the base station.
Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [1]. The keypad will display the
current Area system options.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Area 1 = Common Area
Setting this option will cause the system to automatically arm Area
1 All On when all other areas have been turned on. As soon as any
area is turned off the system will automatically turn Area 1 off. Only
one common area is available on the system. If no common area is
required then do not set this option.
First To Open / Last To Close
Alarm On LAN Fail
Setting this option will cause the system to only report an opening
signal to the base station when the first area is Disarmed and a closing
signal when the last area has been armed or turned All On.
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an alarm when a device
connected to the LAN failed to communicate to the panel.
Reset Siren All Users
Monitor Default PIN Codes
Setting this option will cause the panel to monitor the default
Installer PIN and User 1 PIN which are factory set to 1234 and 2580
respectively. If either of these codes are left as default then the keypad
will display the system trouble Default PIN. The fault will clear once
the code or codes have been changed.
PIN Always Required
Setting this option will force the system to request a valid PIN to be
entered before any menu functions can be accessed. If this option is
not set then some restricted menu options will be available without
entering a valid PIN.
Display Menu Numbers
Setting this option causes the keypad to display the menu numbers
for all commands and menu programming options. The menu
numbers can be used as navigation shortcuts when programming.
11-12
Setting this option allows a user with a valid PIN to silence alarm
outputs from any keypad on the system without the need to toggle
the keypad to the area that the alarm occurred.
If this option has not been programmed, the user will need to toggle
the keypad to the area the alarm occurred in and then silence the
alarm by entering their PIN followed by the [OFF] key.
Power Up In Same State As Powered Down
Setting this option will cause the panel to power up in the same state
as it was when it was powerd down. For example with this option
set if the panel is in the disarmed state and all power is removed for
service work to be done. When the power is reapplied, the panel
will start in the disarmed state. Any zone that was programmed as
bypassed when the power was removed will remain bypassed when
the power supply has restored.
If this option is not programmed, the system will always power up in
the armed All On state and any zones bypassed prior to power loss
will power up as un-bypassed zones.
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
Fault Acknowledge All Areas
System > Options >
Setting this option allow system trouble faults to be acknowledged
from any area or keypad on the system without the need to toggle
over to the area the fault occurred in.
-
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
0
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Delay Trouble Beeps
0
MENU 7-7-3
0
˚C
Hi TEMP
0
˚C
Lo TEMP
Setting this option will prevent any system trouble events from
sounding the keypad speaker between the hours of 10pm until 7am.
During this time, any new trouble events will be shown in the keypad
display.
This menu allows you to set the keypad High and Low
temperature values which the system will monitor. Valid
temperatures are from 00 ˚C minimum to a maximum of 50 ˚C
with a tolerance = +/- 1 ˚C.
If any trouble events are still in effect at 7am, the keypad will begin
sounding the trouble alert to notify the user of the problem. The function is primarily for use in residential installations.
If the temperature on the selected keypad falls below the
minimum set temperature then the keypad will display ‘Low
Temp xx˚C If the temperature increases above the maximum
set temperature then the keypad will display High temp xx˚C.
System > Options >
Keypad Idle Screen

0 = No Idle Screen
2 = Time
1 = Date and Time
3 = Custom Screen
MENU 7-7-2
0
Where xx = the set temperature to be monitored.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [3]. The keypad will display the
current temperature settings.
1)
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
High Temp Low Temp
00
00
Press  OK to SAVE
This menu allows you to sellect a keypad Idle Screen which
will appear on the display when there has been no activity at
the keypad for a period of 2 minutes. The keypad display will
return to normal as soon as any key has been pressed.
The are two built-in Idle Screens and one custom Idle
screen which can be created and programmed only via the
SolutionLink upload/download software. The custom screen
can be used to display the Installer name and logo or other
information as required.
All keypads on the system will display the same screen saver.
See the examples below.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [2]. The keypad will display the
current Keypad Idle Screen option.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to program the High and Low
temperatures. Use the left and right arrow keys to move
between the High and Low temperatures.
Valid range =( 0˚C to 50˚C).
3)
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
System > Installer Options >
Installer Options
Keypad Idle Screen
00 - No Idle Screen
Press  0-9 OK to SAVE
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to select which idle screen
you want to display then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.

MENU 7-7-4
1
Report/Log Entry/Exit Intstaller Menu
2
Report/Log Program Data Change
Y
3
Arm Only Installer PIN
N
4
Reserved
N
5
Auto Exit Installer Menu In 2 Hours
Y
6
Auto Exit Service mode In 2 Hours
Y
7
Reserved
N
8
Factory Defaulting Allowed
Y
N
This menu allows you to configure the Installer system options.
Wed 05-Jan-2005
Time > 10:34am
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1)
Report Installer
 Report Prog Change
Reserved
Press  OK ON OFF MENU
10:34am
i
The custom idle screen can only be programmed via the
SolutionLink upload / download software.
Note
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [4]. The keypad will display the
current Installer options.
2)
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the option then
press the [ON] key to enable or the [OFF] key to disable.
3)
Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
11-13
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
Report/Log Entry/Exit Installer Menu
2)
Setting this option will cause the panel to make a log entry and to
send a report to the base station when the installer enters and exits
Installer programming mode. The entry/exit reports will follow the
System Route.
Using the numeric keys, enter the language option as required
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
System Testing
Report/Log Program Data Changed
Setting this option will cause the panel to make a log entry and to
send a report to the base station when the installer has changed
programming data. The data changed reports will follow the System
Route.
Arm Only Installer PIN
System > System Testing >
--
Walk Test All Zones
MENU 7-9-0
This menu allows you to test all zones within an area at the
same time.
Setting this option will prevent the installer PIN holder from disarming
the system. Normally the installer PIN is able to arm and disarm the
system.
1)
Press [MENU] + [7] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will display a list of
areas that are available to walk test zones.
Auto Exit Installer Menu In 5 Minutes
2)
Using the up and down arrow keys, select the area that you
want to walk test, then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter
the area number, then press [OK]. The keypad will begin to
scroll all zones that need to be tested.
Setting this option will cause the panel to automatically terminate
Installer programming mode after 5 minutes of no activity on the
keypad. If this option is not set, the panel will remain in Installer
programming mode until manually terminated.
To test Z001 open/close
Zone 1
Auto Exit Service Mode In 2 Hours
Setting this option will cause the panel to automatically terminate
service mode after 2 hours of no activity on the keypad keys. If this
option is not set, the panel will remain in the service mode until it is
manually terminated.
Press OK or MENU
3)
Factory Defaulting Allowed
Setting this option will allow the panel to be defaulted back to the
factory setting using the the on board push button switch. See below
for defaulting instructions.
Open and close each zone that needs to be tested. A zone that
has been successfully tested will no longer scroll on the keypad
display. When all zones have been tested, the keypad will
display.
Selected zones have been
Tested OK
If this option is not set then manual defaulting will not function and
the only way to default the panel will be by using the current installer
PIN. If the installer PIN is not know then the panel will need to be
returned to Bosch for defaulting. A $50.00 charge applies for this
service.
i
Defaulting the panel does not erase all events in the history
Press OK or MENU
4)
event log.
Note
Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
System > System Testing >
--
Battery Test
System >Options >
Language

MENU 7-7-5
0 = English
0
MENU 7-9-1
This menu allows you to test the panels standby battery. The
battery test will last about two minutes and the keypad will
display the voltage of the battery during the test.
1 = Alternate Language
This menu allows you to select the language that will be
displayed on the keypad. You have a choice between English
(default) or a second language (determined by the country
that the control panel is shipped to).
1)
1)
Battery test in progress.
Please wait..
Voltage = 13.4V
To Go Back Press OK
Enter [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [5]. The keypad will display the
following:
Language
Press [MENU] + [7] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will display the
battery voltage whilst under test:
2)
If the battery has passed the test, the keypad will display:
Battery Test Passed
Tested OK
0
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Press OK or MENU
11-14
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
3)
If the battery has failed the test, the keypad will display:
Battery Test Failed.
Please Call For Service.
Press OK to Continue
4)
Press [OK] to exit.
» » E N D
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 |
O F
S E C T I O N « «
11-15
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | System Programming
This page left intentionally blank
11-16
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 12
Programming Examples
This section includes a number of programming examples
detailling how to implement some common installation
functionality.
Examples are provided to show;
Wire Output 5 to the appropriate Door Controller input. Each
time button 5 on the keypad is pressed the door will activate.
Opening a Garage Door Using a 4 Button RF Keyfob
The following example show how to configure the Solution
64 to allow control of a grage door as well as arm and disarm
functions using a 4 Button Keyfob. The example assumes User
10 and Output 5 are being used. (Output 5 is located on the
CM110 Output Expander).

How to Open a Garage Door using a Single Digit Code.

How to Open a Garage Door using a 4 Button Keyfob.

How to set Auto Arming for an Area.
Procedure

How to operate an Output using a Schedule
1)
Set RF Receiver Type MENU 3-5-0 = D
(D = DS Type)

How to Use a Reader to Unlock a Door.
2)
Assign Keyfob to User 10 MENU 1-3-0 = 123456789

How to Use a Reader to Unlock a Door and Disarm Area 1.
3)

How to Use a Reader to Unlock a Door and Arm/Disarm.
Set Output 5 - Event Type MENU 4-1-1 = 53
(53 = RF Keyfob Function 1)

How to use Call Line Identification.
4)
Set Output 5 - Event Assignment MENU 4-1-2 = 1
(1 =Area Number)

How to send SMS Reports.
5)
Set Output 5 - Output Polarity MENU 4-1-3 = 4
(4 =Normally Open One Shot Low)
6)
Set Output 5 - Time Parameter MENU 4-1-4 = 000 000 005 000
(5 seconds)
7)
Enable Output 5 - Output Options MENU 4-1-5 = Display Status
Message.
Opening a Door using a Single Digit Code
The Solution 64 can be used to operate an electrically
controlled door using a single digit code. The example assumes
User 10 and Output 5 are being used. (Output 5 is located on
the CM110 Output Expander).
Procedure
1)
Set User Pin Code Length MENU 1-5-0 = 0
(0 = Variable Length)
2)
Set User 10 - PIN Code MENU 1-1-2 = 5
3)
Set User 10 - Area Assignment MENU 1-4-1 = NNNNNNNN
4)
Set Output 5 - Event Type MENU 4-1-1 = 56
(56 = Follow Pin)
5)
Set Output 5 - Event Assignment MENU 4-1-2 = 10
(10 =User Number)
6)
Set Output 5 - Output Polarity MENU 4-1-3 = 4
(4 = Normally Open One Shot Low)
7)
Set Output 5 - Time Parameter MENU 4-1-4 = 000 000 005 000
(5 seconds)
8)
Enable Output 5 - Output Options MENU 4-1-5 = Display Status
Message
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Auto Arming an Area
The Solution panel can be configured to automatically arm and
or disarm an area automatically if required.
Procedure
To setup an Auto Arming time, select a schedule that is not
being used, and program the schedule name to something
convenient. Set the start time for the schedule to the arming
time you require. The stop time should be set to 12:00am or --:-am, which prevents the system from auto disarming.
Now set the Schedule Function, MENU 7-5-3 to Area On/Off
and the Schedule Index, MENU 7-5-4 to correspond to the area
to operate. If an index of 0 is used then arming will occur for all
areas. Finally select the days of the week you wish auto arming
to occur in MENU7-5-2
12-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Programming Examples
Operating an Output with a Schedule
To automatically operate an output using a schedule, select
an schedule that is not being used, and program the schedule
name to something convenient. Set the start time to the
time you want the output to operate, and set the stop time
to the time you want the output to turn off. Set the Schedule
Function MENU 7-5-3 to Operate Output and set the Schedule
Index MENU 7-5-4 to the Output number which is to operate.
Finally set the days of the week the output is to operate on.
Unlock a Door using an External Reader
This example assumes Reader 9, Access Group 4 and Output 5
are being used.
Procedure
1)
Assign Proximity Reader 9 to Access Group 4, MENU 1-6-1.
2)
Set output 5 to Event type = 60 - Access Group and Access
Assignment = 4
3)
Assign the user to Access Group 4, MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple Access Groups allowing access to multiple
doors.
4)
Assign Reader 8 to Area Assignment = 0 (All Areas) and then
set disable arm/disarm options in MENU 1-6-3.
5)
Present the Token to the Reader to access the door.
Unlock a Door and Disarm Area 1 using an External
Reader
This example assumes Reader 9, Access Group 4 and Output 5
are being used.
Procedure
1)
Assign Proximity Reader 9 to Access Group 4, MENU 1-6-1.
2)
Set output 5 to Event type = 60 -Access Group and Access
Assignment = 4.
3)
Assign the user to Access Group 4, MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple Access Groups allowing access to multiple
doors.
4)
Assign Reader 8 to Area Assignment = 1 and then set the
disarming option in MENU 1-6-3.
5)
Present the Token to the Reader to Disarm, present the Token
again to release the door.
Unlock a Door and Arm/Disarm Area 1 using an
External Reader
This example assumes Reader 9, Access Group 4 and Output 5
are being used.
Procedure
1)
Assign Proximity Reader 9 to Access Group 4, MENU 1-6-1.
2)
Set output 5 to Event type = 60 (Access Group) and Access
Assignment = 4.
3)
Assign the user to Access Group 4, MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple Access Groups allowing access to multiple
doors.
4)
Assign Reader 9 to Area Assignment = 1 then set the arming/
disarming and badging option in MENU 1-6-3.
5)
Present the token to Disarm, present the Token to release door,
present the token 3 times to Arm the system.
Using C.L.I. to establish Upload/Download
Connection
Calling Number Identification is a feature provided by your
teleco line provider that can help you identify who is calling by
displaying the caller’s phone number.
This feature is used by the Solution control panel to identify
the telephone number that the upload download computer is
calling from. When the Solution panel verifies that the calling
number corresponds to any one of the three different numbers
programmed in MENU 5-3-7 — CLI Number then the panel will
answer the call immediately.
This feature is extremely helpful for remote access using the
Bosch Solutionlink software to eliminate the need for making
multiple calls to fax bypass or annoying customer calls where
you have to let the number ring numerous times to trigger the
panel into answering your call.
The numbers you store into MENU 5-3-7 should include the full
STD number of the calling line you which the panel to answer
on.
Almost every telephone line will send its CLI information when
making a call however you will not receive the callers line
information if you don’t specifically request and enable this
feature with your telco line provider.
Sending SMS Alarm Reports
The Solution panel is capable of reporting alarm information
directly to a mobile phone using SMS messaging without the
need to add any additional hardware.
Procedure
1) Determine the required reporting destination and set
the reporting format to SMS.
2) Program the access number into the Primary and
Secondary telephone numbers.
3) Program the mobile phone number that the messages
are to be sent to into the account code for the
corresponding destination. In multi-area systems
you will need to enter the appropriate mobile phone
number for each area.
4)
Program the SMS password. The panel default is set for
the Telstra network.
5) Program the destination route for each event type
which is required to report to SMS. By default all event
types report to route 1.
» » E N D
12-2
O F
S E C T I O N « «
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

Panel Description
Solution 64 (Part Number CC110)
Voltage Input
16-22 VAC
Current
Requirements
22 VA min 3 wire plug pack adapter or
transformer
S e c t ion 13
Specifications
Compatible
Accessories
CM100 Voice Command Module
CM105 16/32 Zone Expander
CM106 8/16 Piggy Back Zone Expander
CM110 4 Way Relay Output Module
CM120 1 Amp LAN Power Supply
CM130 Serial Output Module
CM140 GSM Modem Module
CM150 TCP/IP Interface Module
SW500 SolutionLink (RAS) Software
Enclosure
Dimensions
375mm (W), 257mm (H), 90mm (D)
Part Number: MW100
Power Outputs
Continuous
Power
1 Amp (Primary supply source only)
Secondary
Source
4 Amp (Total with both primary and
secondary source combined)
Stand-by Battery
Min Operating
Voltage
12 VDC, 7AH sealed rechargeable
battery
235mm (W), 40mm (H), 85mm (D)
Warranty
3 years from date of manufacture
(return to base)
10.2 VDC
You should receive the following parts with the panel.
Discharge Cycle
AC Off
PWA Dimensions
Keypads indicate trouble condition, AC
Fail report sent (if programmed)
13.8 VDC
Charging level
11.5 VDC
Low battery trouble at keypads, low
battery report sent (if programmed)
10.0 VDC
Panel shuts down as voltage fails below
10.2 VDC
Panel Assembly
Includes
Resistor Pack
Includes
Recharge Cycle
AC On
13.0 VDC
Panel restarts, battery charging begins.
AC trouble clears from keypads,
AC restore report sent (if programmed).
Battery trouble clears from keypads,
Battery restore report sent.
(if programmed).
13.8 VDC
Battery pulse charged.
LAN BUS
12 VDC, 305 m of 14/0.20 0.8mm2
(22 AWG) cable.
Telephone
Connections
RJ-12 Socket and 4-way terminal
Temperature
0˚ to 55˚C
Relative
Humidity
Compatible
Keypads
Available
Separately
Metal Enclosure
Panel PWA
User Manual
Installer Reference Guide
Resistor Pack
1 x Red Battery Lead
1 x Black Battery Lead
1 x 2-Way Shunt With Handle
2 x Phillips Pan Head Zinc Plate Screw
1 x Telephone Cable RJ12 6P/4C
10 x 3K3 – 0.25W +/- 1% Resistors
10 x 6K8 – 0.25W +/- 1% Resistors
1 x 3-Way AC Terminal Block
1 x Panel Tamper Switch
1 x Tamper Switch Bracket
BLCC110I Installation Manual
SolutionLink (RAS) Software
5 to 85% at 30˚C non-condensing.
Graphic Keypads
Graphic Keypads with Prox
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
13-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Specifications
This page left intentionally blank
13-2
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I

S e c t ion 14
Index
A
D
Access Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Address Select
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Alpha Text Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Answering Machine Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Areas
Area Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Area Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Area Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Area Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Chime On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Exit Time Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Senior Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Stobe Trigger
Fire Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Strobe Trigger
Audible Burglary Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Silent Burglary Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Turn All Areas Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Turn All Areas On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Turn Area On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Area Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Arm Only Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Auto Arm Pre-Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Daylight Saving
Australian Daylight Savings Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Summertime Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Summertime On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Template Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Defaulting the System
Domestic Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Factory Defaulting Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Hardware Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Software Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Delay Trouble Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Dialler Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Dialler Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Direct Link Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Domestic Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 11-3
Domestic Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1, 9-3
DTMF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Duress Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Duress Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
B
Basic Reporting Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
C
Call Attempt Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Call Back Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Call Back Verification Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Call Forward Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Call Forward On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Call Forward On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cancel Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
CLI Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Clock Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 11-4
Command Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Common Area
Link To Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Comms Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
E
Entry Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Entry Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
EOL Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Event Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Exit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Exit Time Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Expire PIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
F
Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Acknowledge All Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fault Acknowledge All Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Fire Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Fuse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
H
Handover
Non Sequential Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Pulse Count Handover Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
History Log Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Holidays
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Start Stop Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Home Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Horn Speaker Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Horn Speaker Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
14-1
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Index
I
Indicators
Keypad LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installer PIN
Change PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-1
5-7
4-1
K
Keyfobs
Add Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Delete Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Test Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Keypad
Beeper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Display Area Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Emergency Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Home Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Keypad Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Keypad Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Keypad Idle Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Keypad Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Keyswitch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
M
MENU REFERENCE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Monitor Default PIN Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
O
Open/Close Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Open/Close Reports For Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Open/Close Reports Only After Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Open / Close Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
OUTPUTS
Event Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Event Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Output Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Output Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 10-1
Time Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Turn Output On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Output Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Output Event Type Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Output Pre-Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Output Testing
External Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Internal Bell Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Strobe Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
P
Part Mode Entry Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Phone Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Phone Number Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 9-2
Installer PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
PIN Expire Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
PIN Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
PIN Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Programming
14-2
Alpha Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Examples
Auto Arming an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening a Door using a Single Digit Code . . . . . . . .
Opening Garage Door Using a 4 Button Keyfob . . .
Operating an Output with a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending SMS Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock Door & Arm/Disarm Area via Reader . . . . . .
Unlock Door and Disarm Area via Reader . . . . . . . . .
Using C.L.I. to establish SolutionLink Connection .
Prox Readers
Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arming Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Badging Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disarming Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part On Badging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reader Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zero Exit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Handover Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Count Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
1-1, 4-1
4-2
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-9
6-4
7-6
R
Reporting Options
Burg Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Emergency Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Fire Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Status Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Swinger Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Test Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
TX Format Dest 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
TX Format Dest 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
RF Devices
Add RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Delete RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Test RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
RF Device Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
RF I.D.Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
RF Receiver Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
RF Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
RF SuperSolution Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Ring Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
S
Schedules
Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Senior Watch Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Sensor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 11-4
Siren Swinger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
Solution 64 | Installer Guide | Index
Smart Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
SMS Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Speaker Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Swinger Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
System Options
Area Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Installer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
System Power
AC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Arming Allowed On Low Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Battery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Fuse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Synchronise System Clock to AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
System Programming
Panel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
System Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
System Trouble Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
V
T
Bypass Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Set Chime Zones
Chime Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Set Part 2 Zones
Part 2 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Zones
Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Add RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Area Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Delete RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
EOL Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Input Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Inverted Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Keyswitch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Sensor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Tamper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Test On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Test RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Zone Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Smoke Sensor Reset
Smoke Sensor Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Zone Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 7-1
Zone Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Zone Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Zone Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Zone Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Tamper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Testing The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Battery Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Walk Test All Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Test Dialler
Dial Number Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Test On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Test Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Test Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Test Report Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Test Report Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Test Report Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Timer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Token
Add Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Delete Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Token Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
U
USERS
Access Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Add PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Add Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Can Auto Bypass Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Can Bypass Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Change Other PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Change Own PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Delete PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Delete Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Erase User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
PIN Expire Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
PIN Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
PIN Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Send Open/Close Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Timer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
User Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
View PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
User Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
User PIN Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
User Test Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
User Test Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Bosch Security Systems | 11/05 | BLCC110I
SolutionLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
SolutionLink RAS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
SolutionLink Security PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Voice Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
W
Walk Test 24-Hour Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Walk Test All Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Walk Test A Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Walk Test Fire Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Walk Test Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Wiring
Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Zone Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Z
14-3
Bosch Security Systems
25 Huntingwood Drive
Huntingwood, 2148
Australia
Phone: +612 9672 1777
Facsimile: +612 9672 1717
© 2005 Bosch Security Systems
BLCC110I
920303
Issue FTR1.2